Home

R&S®FSV-K73 3GPP FDD UE User Manual

1. Filters OVEIVIOW M M 35 Selecting 94 Types cene 94 Frame TO Analyze EE 46 frequency OMSET once rado HEEL Dea cus 44 65 88 ric M 88 SLOP ss acq Aue Hee bL oM et rA 88 Frequency GOING TEE Uae Frequency mask trigger Frequency mMenu ns Frontend setlirigs ener trente tae Full Scale Level Digital Baseband IQ remote control 214 Digital UO Interface remote control us Digital Le WEE 79 IER E 59 H Hysteresis Lower Auto level ssiri eere eere 77 Upper Auto level 5 rte re 77 l IEC IEEE bus Command description ssssesees 109 Impedance IUE Dese parr icit degen eege 96 Inactive Channel Threshold ssseeessss 228 Inherent noise COMO CUON RR 95 Input sample rate Digitall O EE 79 INPUPOUTPULIMENU iesea sinoni 77 106 Invert Q IQ capture settings IQ Capture Settings KIZ ainai M IQ imbalance ege E K key TU WEE 65 Auto Scrambling Gode ittm T AUTOSE T 5 ierit aO FREQ osse 64 INPUT QUTPUT iet erit trei mds 106 MAR iier sre Mc 73 SWEEP ie deeg ge 68 e EE 69 Key INPUT OUTPBPLET 2r eee eot rna torrent 77 L level Cc 92 display range xa 91 92 ANOS p Hr 91 92 Level EE ne Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote control elle te
2. 90 cio me 90 L Range Log LO s EE 91 L Range Log E ERNEUT 91 L Range Log TO OB oae adito nets tvsnrestncenerdiar ncs ere basib eS 91 L Rande Logo dB RENE ERE 91 L Range Log GI NN NC 92 Bc F1 7 MP 92 L Range AN RNC 92 L Range Uim UNE aere EE UR 92 KE EA A E E ebe ee EN aes caret Ra Gs 92 Preamp ONO eae AE d debes T dado trus 93 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 93 RF AttemAutoMBSbDUAE AIO uec catt ce tex o e te rene b ee ERR eee Ra Cerda 94 EL Aten OMOR PET 94 El Atten Mode AUG EE 94 Ref Level OSEE D Eed Edge ee Meese 95 Feet Lavel POS Le EE 95 s Re 95 Noise E ee 95 PNW EE DEE 96 mput S0 OS EE 96 YIG FREON OM EE 96 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 209 Range Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis This softkey and its submenu are available for RF measurements RF Measurements Range Log 100 dB Range Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n
3. 121 CAL CGulate nz LUIMt AChower Al Temate 2JizAbBGolute 120 CALCulate n LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate ch RELative essen 119 CAL Culate nz UM AChower Al Temate ch TREL atvelzTATle 119 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower STATe 116 CALCulatesn gt MARKersm gt AOF E 122 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CP Ch eese esesseee eene eene e niaba 129 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNGtOn PCQOPCh cicci treten re cete ENEE 129 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUIt esses enne nnne 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect 130 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FEUNGC onWCDbower MS RE Gu 131 GAL Culate sn MARKersm FUNGtion ZOOM 2 ierit ctii cene AEAEE N i 133 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz MAimumlEEFT enne enne nennt nnn thns inniti senten einen 122 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT 122 CAL Culate sn MARKer m MAXimum RIGEIL caeci tiia eere necne race icy dec apes gea EEN CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINImMUMILEF A EE CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINiIMUMINEX T iiti e coto cocer et e kei v erat ope EYE CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt m CALCulate n MARKer m MINimump PEAK eese enne nnne nennen nnne nnns GAL Culate sn MARKer sm POWher RESUIEBEZ riter i uariaaie EEN ities 125 CAbC
4. STATus QUEStionable SYNG ee TR 195 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENI J 5 iter erre rrt rrt terr tn rre rere tina 195 SY STEM DISPlay U PD ate 226 REENEN 196 Use b qp Em 197 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACe lt n gt DATA TRAGeSn DATA ts p E 203 TRIGger n ESEQuence BBPOWerR HOLD E 219 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME TRIGger n SEQuerice IFPower HOLDDoff 2 1c metr rt rre rr ener rte inet TRIGgersnsp SEQuence lEPower HYS leFf8Sls tor trem t Peine Y epu but eet repa repe xke 220 TRIGger n SEQuence EEVelBBBOWSI nr ertet rr terere nen nt TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel EXTernal TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence MASK CONDition TRIGger sn E SEQUENCE SLOBe ntpote eee entrent et re pere nre Ri ee E Re Eer Reie Index A abbreviations V E 30 adjacent channel leakage ratio eesessss 83 Amplitude ip a 90 amplitude power distribution e amplitude probability distribution function 84 Analysis MO E 46 ASCII Trace export cierre eno Decem i etas 37 attenuation Option B25 cete aes 67 94 Attenuation Option B25 E 67 94 Automatic 5 esc rer rns enn cra i Rd es 67 94 ELTERE 66 93 212 OptionrB25 E 66 93 Auto level ek EE 77 Auto Pea
5. sessssessseeeeneeneenee 213 i 79 lee UE 53 default Ell M 53 seram 53 removing Cut WE display mode EIS ANN Rc Code Domain Channel Table P Code Domain Error bssssotesnsoaennor Raan EE Code Domain Power s ssssssssssssssrsessresrrnssrrreesrnnssrnesns Code Domain Result Summary 099 Composite Const 4 8 Composite EVM 56 EVM vs Chip 20 Frequency Err vs Slot 64 Mag Error VS Chip cesar etre pota ea ener eri coves 57 Peak Code Domain Error ssssesseeseseeesesrreerienserreenneee 56 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot w 64 Phase Enon VS UE 58 Power VS EE 58 63 SS VIMO 6701 n 63 Symbol EVM 159 S mbol Magnitude EMOT oc oa ror povero 59 Geteste eege eegen 59 ee Ee 59 display range TOV Se ree ces N 91 92 Display range EEN eege 44 64 86 DPC GUA cR 228 DPOC H ERE 228 E Electronic input attenuation 5V B25 ntt oed et ente c du C ache 216 Eliminate Tail Chips TP M yes 52 EX IQ BOX 80 DiglConf 81 export formal A E E E EE EEEE 37 external noise source cccccccceceesseeeeeeecesssteeeeeenens 78 106 F FFT Filter Mode ANU ta WE 100 105 INGETOW oiiae ereta deae er ne aaa A irora 100 105 SONKO sintissi suiii anden e ade geile 100 105 Filter types iue EE Normal 3dB p cp
6. m M M E Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 81 RF Measurements 7 2 RF Measurements 7 2 1 Output Power Measurements ssssssssssssseseeeene eene enne 82 7 2 2 Spectrum Emission Mask 82 7 2 3 Adjacent Channel Power ACLR enne 83 7 2 4 Occupied Bandwidt AA 84 T29 CCDF WE 84 7 2 6 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K 3 85 7 2 0 1 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu 85 7 2 0 2 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements sss 88 7 2 0 3 Softkeys of the Amplitude Men 90 7 2 0 4 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Men 96 7 2 0 5 Softkeys of the Sweep Men 103 7 2 0 6 X Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements sss 106 7 2 1 Output Power Measurements The R amp S FSVR measures the unweighted RF signal power in a bandwidth of Jay 5MHz a 384MIkE a 2022 The power is measured in zero span mode time domain using a digital channel filter of 5 MHz in bandwidth According to the 3GPP standard the measurement bandwidth 5 MHz is slightly larger than the minimum required bandwidth of 4 7 MHz The band width is displayed numerically below the screen Remote CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 164 7 2 2 Spectrum Emission Mask The measurement Spectrum Emission Mask is the determination of the power of the 3GPP FD
7. The output format is identical to that of the CALCulate FEED subsystem command for an activated Bitstream display The only difference is the number of symbols which are evaluated The ABITstream parameter evaluates all symbols of one frame Each sym bol contains two QPSK or four 16QAM consecutive bits One value is transferred per bit range 0 1 The number of symbols is not constant and may vary depending on the selected channel and its symbol modulation type Individual symbols in the bit stream may be invalid depending on the channel type and the bit rate symbols without power In this case the character 9 is returned Unit 0 Value range 0 1 7 9 0 Low state of a transmitted bit 1 High state of a transmitted bit 6 Suppressed symbol of a HS DPCCH slot 9 Bit of an inactive channel Bits per slot NaitPerSymb 2 Number of symbols Ngymp 150 2 8 Code Class Number of bits Nai Ngymb Naipersymb Format Bitoo Bitor Bit Bit44 Bitgo Bity BitNsymb o Bitnsymb 1 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC2 FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam Sets the result display for screen B to bitstream TRAC2 DATA ABITstream2 Returns the bit streams of all 15 slots in trace 2 screen B one after the other Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA CEVM This command reads the root mean square RMS value of the error vecto
8. ccssccsceseensssssceeseenceaentscnseceessnnenteensensanaeseneneenes GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABIe DEL te nre trn tr rr rene GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABlIe EDATSa cetero rcr t en do Re e ER EN CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPCe se CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABIE NAME clarins aada GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SEL6Ct rer rrr nemen erre eei creer don ea P Ra CGONFigure WGDPower MS GTABIe S EN E CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASuremerl rtt rtr EA A e Pr HER cha DlAGnostic n SERVice NSOUrCG nir heroe ote rnt e EXER ERR EET REY eed FE EEREAEE EE Eau DISPlay E WINDOWS STAT 6 REM DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE M DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGe xt Y SPAGing toner tnt rn inh tne eraai a aea DISPlay WINDowsri TRACest Y SCALe eco oot ta rrr ener eut trie eor ree mo rp ener iens DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE essent nennen nnne DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVElL eee ce eter cenee cess eeneeseeeseeeseaeeeeeseeeseeeenaeensaees DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OF FSet 00 eee sse 210 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe RPOSition esee 210 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue seen nennen nennen 210 DISPlay WINDBowsr TRACe t S TAT6 orto ren ttr nere neto t
9. Suffix lt n gt n irrelevant Parameters RST 200DBM The first value is the limit for the lower and the upper adjacent channel The second limit value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSE family Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value in for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm Mode WCDMA CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent chan nel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power is performed Before the com mand the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement must be globally Switched on using CALC LIM ACP ON The result can be queried with CALC LIM ACP ACH RES It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no valid results are available Suffix n 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper lower adjacent chan nel in the selected measurement window when adjacent channel power measurement is p
10. code class Code class of the channel 2 9 channel number Code number of the channel 0 511 absolute level Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot The channel slot can be marked by the SELECTED CPICH slot relative level gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power The channel slot can be marked by the SELECTED CPICH slot lt timing offset gt Timing offset of the code channel to the frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 0 38400 chips Example TRAC2 DATA TRACE2 Returns the trace data from trace 2 screen B Usage Query only Mode WCDMA 8 8 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual The following commands are identical to those in the base unit and are included in this manual only because they are specifically referenced to here See also chapter 8 5 3 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual on page 184 and chapter 8 2 6 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Man ual on page 133 8 8 1 DISPlay Gubevstem eene nennen nennen nennen 207 8 8 2 INPut subsvsiem nennen LADATA nennen enne nennen nne nnns 211 8 83 TRIGger Gubevetem nennen enne 219 8 8 4 Other Referenced Commandes 222 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual 8 8 1 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt
11. 7 1 4 Display Concept Measurement results The code domain analyzer can show up to four result diagrams in four different screens windows at one time For each screen you can define which type of result diagram is to be displayed or deactivate the screen temporarily The current configura tion of the display i e which screens are displayed and which result diagram is dis played in which screen can be stored and retrieved later Thus you can easily switch between predefined display configurations All results are calculated from the same dataset of the recorded signal Thus it is not necessary to restart the measurement in order to switch the display mode R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Spectrum Analyzer 3G FDD UE Ref Level 10 00 dBm Freq 413 223738645 MHz Channel 0 2561 Power Relative Att 10 dB 0 Capture Frame SGL Global Result Frame 0 Slot 0 1 AvgLin 0 00 dB 0 Chips 0 00 dBm The available measurement types and result diagrams are described in chapter 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer on page 55 For more information on the display configuration see the description of the Display Config on page 53 softkey Measurement settings The most important measurement settings are displayed in the diagram header For Code Domain Analyzer measurements the following settings are shown Label Description Ref level Reference level defin
12. Channel Detection Settings Opens the New Channel Table dialog box to define new channel table settings Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 0 000 wt Se We Enter Name and Description for the new channel table and define the settings in the table below Channel Type Type of channel active channels only Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Channel Number Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Mapping Component onto which the channel is mapped I or Q The entry is not edita ble since the standard specifies the channel assignment for each channel Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH CDP Relative Channel relative referred to the total power of the signal Status Status display Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Meas New Channel Detection Settings Creates a new channel table with the settings from the current measurement data Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 RECENT Measurement data EXE mn ota LJL T E Wel Copy Channel Detection Settings Opens the Copy Channel Table dialog box to copy the currently displayed channel table Enter a name for the new table edit the settings as described for a new table see New on page 49 and select Save Edit Channel Detection Settings Opens the Edi
13. e Adjacent Channel Power ACLR see chapter 7 2 3 Adjacent Channel Power ACLR on page 83 e Spectrum Emission Mask see chapter 7 2 2 Spectrum Emission Mask on page 82 e Occupied Bandwidth see chapter 7 2 4 Occupied Bandwidth on page 84 e CCDF see chapter 7 2 5 CCDF on page 84 All these measurements are accessed via the MEAS key measurement menu Some parameters are set automatically according to the 3GPP standard A list of these parameters is given with each measurement type A set of parameters is passed on from the 3GPP user equipment measurements option to the base unit and vice versa in order to provide a quick swap see the following table Working with the Frequency Mask Trigger Transferred parameters center frequency reference level attenuation reference level offset trigger source 6 3 Working with the Frequency Mask Trigger The Frequency Mask Trigger FMT is a trigger designed to trigger measurements if the signal violates certain conditions with respect to a frequency mask that you can define prior to the measurement Availability of the frequency mask trigger Note that the frequency mask trigger is available for code domain analysis only To create and edit a frequency mask you can access the corresponding dialog box via the Frequency Mask softkey in the trigger menu Opening the dialog box also opens a softkey submenu that contains various func
14. lt FunctionType gt VIDeo LINear POWer VIDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 6 4 5 Select ing the Appropriate Filter Type on page 34 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 In realtime mode the resolution bandwidth is always coupled to the span In all other modes a change of the resolution bandwidth automatically turns the coupling to the span off Parameters lt Bandwidth gt refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Res BW Manual on page 97 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO State This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the current frequency span according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth Use
15. Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper alternate adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt
16. INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value Other Commands Referenced in this Manual If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Parameters lt Attenuation gt 0 25 RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all Manual operation See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 67 INPut EATT AUTO State This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all Manual operation See El Atten On Off on page 67 See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 67 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt S
17. RST OFF ON Changes of power are expected Therefore an EVM mea surement interval of one slot minus 25 us 3904 chips is consid ered OFF Changes of power are not expected Therefore an EVM measurement interval of one slot 4096 chips is considered Example SENS CDP ETCH ON Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Eliminate Tail Chips on page 52 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe State This command selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT Parameters State ON If an unfiltered WCDMA signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation OFF If a filtered WCDMA signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal RST ON Example SENS CDP FILT STAT OFF Mode WCDMA Manual operation See RRC Filter on page 46 SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue Frame This command defines the frame to be analyzed within the captured data Range numeric value 0 CAPTURE LENGTH 1 Parameters Frame numeric value RST 1 Example CDP FRAM VAL 1 Mode WCDMA SENSe CDPower FRAMe LVALue Value Selects the frame to be analyzed Parameters Value numeric value 0 CAPTURE LENGTH 1 RST 0 Example SENS
18. Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 208 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace Using video band widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed If pulsed signals are to be measured it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth VBW 10 x RBW for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly The following filter types are available e Normal 3dB Gaussian filters Further Information The Gaussian filters are set by default The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet e CISPR 6 dB filters MIL Std 6 dB filters Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel filters For details see chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 35 Channel filters do not support FFT mode e RRC filters For details see chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 35 RRC filters do not support FFT mode e 5 Pole filters The available bandwidths are specif
19. Result Summary The Result Summary display mode selects the numerical display of all results Three different tables are available depending if the corresponding window is a full screen a split screen or a quarter screen window The full screen display mode shows the same results as the split screen window but with a bigger font In the quarter screen window only the most important results are displayed on the screen The frame number and the slot number are always displayed in the Global Results header It indicates the slot for which the measurement is performed The entry is only valid if one frame of the 3GPP signal is analyzed The analysis is performed either on a complete slot or a half slot e H eee Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 59 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP EDD UE Measurements EE Table 7 1 Global Results Total Power Chip Rate Error Displays the total signal power average power of total evaluated 3GPP FDD UE slot Displays the chip rate error in the frame to analyze in ppm As a result of a high chip rate error symbol errors arise and the CDP measure ment is possibly not synchronized to the 3GPP FDD UE signal The result is valid even if the synchronization of the analyzer and signal failed IQ Offs Imbalance DC offset and IQ
20. TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp This command returns pilot length channel state channel type modulation type and a reserved value in addition to the values returned for TRACE lt n gt see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 203 It can only be set if CODE PWR ABSOLUTE RELATIVE or CHANNEL TABLE is selected as the display mode for trace 1 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Return values lt Result gt TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 lt code class gt lt channel number gt lt absolute level gt lt relative level gt lt timing offset gt lt pilot length gt lt active flag gt lt channel type gt lt modulation type gt lt reserved gt Comma separated list with 10 values for each channel the channels are output in ascending order sorted by code number i e in the same sequence they are displayed on screen lt code class gt Code class of the channel 2 8 lt channel number gt Code number of the channel 0 255 lt I Q component IQ component of the channel 0 1 0 Q component Channel symbols Sn sent from quadrate component only imaginary part of Sn is used Re Sn 0 Im Sn 0 1 component Channel symbols Sn sent from In phase com ponent only real part of Sn is used Re Sn 0 Im Sn 0 absolute level Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot dBm The channel slot can be marked by the SELECTED CPICH slot relative level R
21. e Allresults that depend on the selected slot are recalculated for selected channel The relevant graphics are updated Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVSL see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 113 Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calculation is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a sym bol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the difference of the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol related to the magnitude of the reference symbol Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM MAGN see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 113 Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calcu lation is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM PHAS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 113
22. 1 228 MHz CFiLter CDMAone 1 28 MHz a 0 22 RRC 1 5 MHz CFiLter DAB 2 MHz CFILter 3 MHz CFILter 3 75 MHz CFiLter 3 84 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA 3GPP 4 096 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA NTT DOCoMo Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 5 MHz CFiLter 20 MHz CFiLter 28 MHz CFiLter 40 MHz CFiLter 6 4 ASCII File Export Format The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semico lon File contents header and data section Description Type FSVR Version 1 45 Date 01 Apr 2010 Date of data set storage Screen A Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 96 Y axis reference position Trace 1 Trace number Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode C
23. Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dB coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Defines a reference position of 20 dBm Manual operation See Ref Value on page 66 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Select a linear scale Manual operation See Range Log 100 dB on page 91 See Range Log 50 dB on page 91 See Range Log 10 dB on page 91 See Range Log 5 dB on page 91 See Range Log 1 dB on page 92 See Range Log Manual on page 92 See Range Linear on page 92 See Range Lin Unit on page 92 INPut subsystem e EI NR ENT 212 INPUEATT6erualion AU TO DEE 212 INPutiC OWNING ET 213 INPGEDIQ Ee pe 213 INPULEDIQERANGe AU TO EE 214 INPut DIO RANGe GODPlitiG ccc roue ctus tpe na Ee eheu erben nee tb pnr aigu mae n tnra ido 214 INPUt ele RANGE UPP DEE 215 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPat DIO RANGE D RE EE 215 INPUT DIG SRAT GS p 216 INPUt DIOS RATS AW Ve ET 216 PIPES e EE 216 INP ULEAD TAT ng e EES ENEE SEENEN 217 INPUT BATTS WAM Em 217 INPUCFIETOCYIGESTATE ouii m 217 INPUL GAINES TAT EE 218 INPutIMPeda
24. This part of the documentation includes only functions of the firmware application R amp S FSV K73 For all other descriptions please refer to the description of the base unit at the beginning of the documentation 3 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 This chapter gives an overview of the Basic Settings in Code Domain Measurement Mode and explains some basic 3GPP FDD user equipment tests It describes how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct presetting The mea surements are performed with an R amp S FSVR equipped with option R amp S FSV K73 Key settings are shown as examples to avoid measurement errors Following the cor rect setting the effect of an incorrect setting is shown The following measurements are performed chapter 3 1 Measurement 1 Measurement of the Signal Channel Power on page 12 chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 chapter 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power on page 14 chapter 3 4 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power on page 16 chapter 3 5 Measurement 5 Measurement of the Composite EVM on page 17 chapter 3 6 Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error on page 18 The measurements are performed using the following units and accessories e The R amp S FSVR with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE user equipment test e Th
25. VIDeo Selects the video trigger The video trigger is available for time domain measurements RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source External on page 47 See Trigger Source Free Run on page 47 8 8 4 Other Referenced Commands FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of evaluation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Parameters lt Separator gt POINt COMMA RST factory setting is POINt RST does not affect set ting Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Other Commands Referenced in this Manual DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or off Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 78 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to
26. i Ref Value Positlon nr tre metere Ref Value Position remote control 210 Reference Position remote control Res BW remote control Res BW Auto remote control Res BW Manual remote control Save Evaluation List remote control Search Lim Off remote control Search Limits remote control Select 1 2 3 4 remote control Select TEE Select Trace remote control i Te EE Ga e Ee NET Single Meas remote control Single Sweep remote control Span MANUAL 1 erret ener ehe Span Manual remote control E Span RBW Auto 50 rms Span RBW Manual geed rtm SPECTRUM EM MASK e Spectrum Emission Mask cp Start remote control Start Frequency remote control iio M Stop remote control T Stop Frequency remote control Sweep Count Sweep Points Sweep Points remote control Sweeptime Auto remote control Trace 1234 5 6 remote control Trace Mode remote control Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg issrisirsiiiriissriiissesrsa Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control 193 221 Trg Gate Source remote control Trigger Holdoff remote control Trigger Out Low High remote control ge Trigge
27. less of the display mode TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Return values lt Result gt lt slot number gt lt level value in dBm gt Comma separated list with 15 pairs of slots slot number of CPICH and level values for 15 slots Default unit Hz Example CALC2 FEED XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute Sets the result display for screen B to POWER VS SLOT TRAC2 DATA TPVSlot Returns a list of absolute frequency errors for all slots in trace 2 screen B Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt t gt This command returns the trace data Depending on the display mode the trace data format varies For details see chapter 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer on page 55 CODE PWR ABSOLUTE RELATIVE CHANNEL TABLE For each channel the class the channel number the absolute level the relative level and the timing offset are returned The class denotes the spreading factor of the chan nel Class 8 corresponds to the highest spreading factor 256 symbol rate 15 ksps class 2 to the lowest admissible spreading factor 4 symbol rate 960 ksps CODE PWR ABSOLUTE RELATIVE The channels are output in ascending order sorted according to the code numbers i e in the same sequence as they are displayed on the screen For CHANNEL TABLE the channels are sorted according to the code classes i e the unassigned channels are transmitted last CODE DOMAI
28. lt Ratio gt Range 0 0001 to 1 RST 0 01 Example BAND RAT 0 01 Manual operation See Span RBW Manual on page 102 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE lt FilterT ype gt This command selects the type of resolution filter For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 34 and chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 35 When changing the filter type the next larger filter bandwidth is selected if the same filter bandwidth is not available for the new filter type 5 Pole filters are not available when using the sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterType gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORMal Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 102 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo Bandwidth This command defines the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are speci fied in the data sheet Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND VID 10 kHz Manual operation See Video BW Manual on page 98 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO State This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio to define the ratio VBW RBW Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND VID AUTO OF
29. pendent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe 1 4 AVERage 1 4 TYPE VIDeo LINear Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or Several times 8 2 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following For details see the chapter SCPI Command Stru
30. CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower STATe lt State gt This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power mea surements in the selected measurement window The commands CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower ACHannel STATe or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower ALTernate STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels Suffix n n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ON Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RELative This command defines the relative limit of the upper lower adjacent channel for adja cent channel power measurements in the selected measurement window The refer ence value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with CALCulate n LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt n irrelevant Parameters RST 0 dB The first numeric value is the limit for the upper lower adjacent channel The second value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSE family Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB S
31. Default unit PCT FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT See 0 1 Span span gt 0 on page 86 See 0 1 RBW span gt 0 on page 87 See 0 5 Span span gt 0 on page 87 See 0 5 RBW span gt 0 on page 87 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines the frequency offset Parameters lt Offset gt Example Manual operation Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit Hz FREQ OFFS 1GHZ See Frequency Offset on page 44 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the frequency span Parameters lt Span gt In analyzer mode the span range is 10 Hz to fmax For SEM and Spurious Emission measurements the minimum span 20 Hz RST fmax Example FREO SPAN 10MHz Manual operation See Span Manual on page 89 SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL This command sets the frequency span to its maximum Example FREQ SPAN FULL Manual operation See Full Span on page 89 SENSe FREQuency STARt Frequency This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span In analyzer mode the span range is 10 Hz to fmax For SEM and Spurious Emission measurements the minimum span 20 Hz RST 0 Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Manual operation See Start on page 88 SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency This command
32. INSTrument subsystem CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa This command defines the values of the selected channel table Code class code class of channel 1 Number of active channels 0 to 4 ECDP rel 1 measured value of channel 1 only when queried ECDP rel 2 measured value of channel 2 only when queried ECDP rel 3 measured value of channel 3 only when queried ECDP rel 4 measured value of channel 4 only when queried Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB EDAT Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPCc This command activates ON or deactivates OFF the E DPCCH entry in a predefined channel table Parameters RST OFF Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB EDAT EDPC ON Mode WCDMA 8 4 INSTrument subsystem The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text parameters or fixed numbers INS Tumen SEE EE 169 INS Trament NSELGDL ou co ean NEES Nee 169 INSTrument SELect Mode This command switches between the measurement modes by means of text parame ters Parameters Mode MWCD 3G FDD UE Mode R amp S FSV K73 option INSTrument NSELect Mode This command switches between the measurement modes by means of numbers 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 5 1 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Mode gt 9 3G FDD UE Mode R amp S FSV K73 option SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters
33. Next Min Mode on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MIN NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Manual operation See Next Min on page 75 See Next Min Mode on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MIN Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is p
34. SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio to define the ratio RBW span Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span Manual operation See Res BW Manual on page 97 See Res BW Auto on page 97 See Default Coupling on page 102 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT lt FilterMode gt This command defines the filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis This command is only available for sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterMode gt AUTO The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best measurement results NARRow The FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter RST AUTO SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example BAND TYPE FFT Select FFT filter Example BAND FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter Manual operation See Auto on page 100 See Narrow on page 100 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio lt Ratio gt This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command RBW span is reciprocal to that of the manual operation span RBW Parameters
35. This command automatically defines the shape of an upper frequency mask according to the spectrum that is currently measured Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer SHIFt X lt Frequency gt This command shifts the lower frequency mask horizontally by a specified distance Positive values move the mask to the right negative values shift the mask to the left You have to select a mask before you can use this command with CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 Parameters lt Frequency gt Defines the distance of the shift Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Manual operation See Shifting mask points as a whole on page 29 CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer SHIFt Y lt Level gt This command shifts the upper frequency mask vertically by a specified distance Posi tive values move the mask upwards negative values shift the mask downwards You have to select a mask before you can use this command with CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 Parameters lt Level gt Defines the distance of the shift The shift is relative to the cur rent position Default unit dB Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Manual operation See Shifting mask points as a whole on page 29 CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer STATe lt State gt This command turns the upper frequency mask on and
36. lt k gt limit line Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIMI FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem The CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem defines the limit check for the Spec trum Emission Mask CAL Culate lt n gt LIMitsk gt ESPectrumiL Mite 5 tte ratae xot end 148 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumMODE sicir r nrn a A EE R EAAS 149 CALOulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class EXCLusive suus 149 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class COUNt sese 150 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class LIMit S TATe sss 150 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClLass Cassz MANimum 151 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MlNimum esee 151 CGALCulatesm LIMitSkesESPectrumRESTOFe oii tic etd a ettet ione NSA 151 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumVAl ue 152 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits lt Limits gt This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Limits gt 1 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 separated by com mas 200 lt 0 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 in ascending order separated by commas gt 20
37. on page 190 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 190 Center CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth RF Measurements This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Marker CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Manual CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 190 Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency The following range of values is allowed fmin s fstart Z fmax y Spanmin fiin fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 192 Stop Opens an edit dialog box to define the stop frequency The following range of values for the stop frequency is allowed fmin t SpanNmin s fstop s fmax f min f max aNd Span min are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe F
38. the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula levelmixer level RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 63 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 212 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 212 EI Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available fo
39. tice uti ette aaa a EE EA EAR 218 dl 218 INPut ATTenuation lt Value gt This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against dam age from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched off This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt Value gt RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode all Manual operation See RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual on page 66 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on th
40. with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN 96 the channel power is output in W CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect lt MeasType gt This command selects and switches on the specified power measurement type in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem Note If CPOWer is selected the number of adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs is set to 0 If ACPower is selected the number of adjacent channels is set to 1 unless adjacent channel power measurement is switched on already The channel adjacent channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To select another trace for the measurement marker 1 is to be positioned on the desired trace by means of CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt MeasType gt ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement with a single carrier sig nal CPOWer Channel power measurement with a single carrier signal equiv alent to adjacent channel power measurement with NO OF ADJ CHAN 0 MCACpower Channel adjacent
41. 1 7 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRIG key R amp S FSV KT73 sssssseees 69 7 1 8 Softkeys of the Trace Menu TRACE key R amp S EGV KO 71 7 1 9 Softkeys of the Marker Menu MKR key R amp S FSV KT3 sss 72 7 1 10 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu MKR gt key R amp S FSV K73 sss 73 7 1 11 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu AUTO SET Key R amp S ESVKO L 76 7 1 12 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements rrenen 77 7 2 RF Measuremente E cc ccccceccccccecteccesescete ecsssoueedcasouted casesuuedccesseaeee ARA n APRI i RR RR ERR ia 82 7 2 1 Output Power Measurements sss emeret nennen entente 82 7 2 2 Spectrum Emission Mask irt rni end d e d ere I n a v ed ca Rae 82 7 2 38 Adjacent Channel Power ACL 83 17 2 4 OCCUPIED Bandwidth iiie prre aedi tb ret te da nei ARR VL ER ERA VEIT NE uds 84 I COR M EE M 84 7 2 6 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K73 sss 85 7 1 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 The Code Domain Analyzer softkey activates the code domain analyzer measurement mode and opens the submenu to set the measurement Refer to chapter 7 1 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 on page 39 for an introduction to the code domain analyzer settings For a brief introduction to the display concept of the code domain analyzer measure ments refer to chapter 7 1 1 Display Concept on page 39
42. 210 Y per Div Scaling The Y PER DIV softkey opens an edit dialog box to change the range per division in the result diagram The range is the length for one section of the y axis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 209 Ref Value Position Scaling The Ref Value Position softkey opens an edit dialog box to adjust the position the ref erence value of the y axis 0 100 96 100 is at the top of the screen 0 is at the bottom of the screen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 210 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 218 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto softkey this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for
43. 48 Deviation Lin Log remote control 211 RE ART ET 53 Edit ACLR Limit remote control 142 143 144 145 146 El Atten Mode Auto Man esses 67 94 Fast ACLR On Off remote control 183 let 102 Filter Type remote control 187 188 Frequency Offset nre 44 65 88 Full Span remote control ntn 192 Grid Abs Rel Grid Abs Rel remote control IF Output IF Video remote control 225 Input 50 Q 75 Q remote control EF Last Spahi iirinn t t e n nre rae ta n Limit Chk On Off remote control 143 147 Limits On Off remote control 127 Link Mrk1 and Delta1 remote control Manual 1 2 ertt tere ir nr e renis Manual remote control Marker 1 remote control seesseesss Marker 1 to 4 remote control 125 126 140 141 Marker 2 remote control 139 Marker 3 remote control 139 Marker 4 remote control 139 Marker NormiDelta rete 73 Marker Norm Delta remote control 139 Marker to Trace remote control Marker Zoom m nem Meas Start Stop remote control Meas TIME te souge rre rtr tete Meas Time Manual ul teens Min remote Control rne mult carr ACLR 164 EE gl EE 75 Next Min
44. AER 33 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type 34 List of Available RRC and Channel FEilters reser rert eeerrerersrrrsrrrrrreesrns 35 ASCII File Export Format 37 Short List of Abbreviations Term or abbreviation Description UE user equipment CPICH common pilot channel DPCH dedicated physical channel data channel FDD frequency division duplexing PCCPCH primary common control physical channel R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements Term or abbreviation PICH Description paging indication channel SCH synchronization channel divided into P SCH primary synchronization channel and S SCH secondary synchronization channel 6 4 2 Channels of the Code Domain Channel Table and Their Usage The channel assignment table contains the following data channels Channel Description DPCCH The Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to synchronize the signal It carries pilot symbols and is expected in the Q branch at code class 8 with code number 0 The channel is displayed in the upper part of the table DPDCH The Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data from the UE to the BS The code allocation depends on the total required symbol rate The following table represents the possible configurations of DPCH spreading factors and code allocation HSDPCCH The High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel
45. AMPT key R amp S FSV K73 The AMPT key opens a submenu to set the level Some softkey functions are not available in CDP mode Refer to the description of the AMPT key in the base unit for information on the other softkeys available for RF mea surements PROM Layel ce echte ete et o ted e t ter etti s eee edis abe e deg 65 pom 66 M i T 66 L Y per dU TRE 66 Es 10 12 10 MN T UM 66 Preamp OMOR E 66 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 66 RF Atten Auto Mech AT AU ear cene tr cec t enl c a nd 67 EI Atten OMO iie iier Pete ceste a PATE eee E OQ Pos te RE TE RE TRY ERI 67 El Atten Mode Auto Man AA 67 P tten dii voice etse de en ead aen aaa Fo ut cen d be ad e ca 68 nput ACDC EE 68 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 209 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Scaling Opens a submenu to define the amplitude scaling type Ref Value Scaling The Ref Value softkey opens an edit dialog box to adjust the reference value DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page
46. All detectors work in parallel in the background which means that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces Number of measured values ie Fl Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 32 During a frequency sweep the R amp S FSVR increments the first local oscillator in steps that are smaller than approximately 1 10 of the bandwidth This ensures that the oscil lator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the pre cision of the measured power The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of oscillator steps It is always selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 default num ber of trace points displayed on the screen Choosing less then 691 measured values e g 125 or 251 will lead to an interpolated measurement curve choosing more than 691 points e g 1001 2001 will result in several measured values being overlaid at the same frequency position Further Information 6 4 4 RMS detector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to ach ieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if t
47. CDP FRAM 1 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Frame To Analyze on page 46 SENSe CDPower HSDPamode State This command selects if the HS DPCCH channel is searched or not SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt State gt ON The HSUPA HSDPA channel can be detected RST ON OFF The HSUPA HSDPA channel cannot be detected Example CDP HSDP OFF Mode WCDMA Manual operation See HS DPA UPA on page 49 SENSe CDPower HSLot lt State gt This command switches the R amp S FSV K73 between the analysis of one half and one full slot Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP HSL ON Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Meas Interval on page 52 SENSe CDPower ICThreshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 dB to 0 dB RST 60 dB Example CDP ICT 50 Sets the Inactice Channel Threshold to 50 dB Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command specifies the number of frames that are captured by one sweep Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 1 to 100 RST 1 Example SENS CDP IQLength 3 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Capture Length on page 47 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV
48. Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the lt UpperLimit gt upper alternate adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent chan nel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the mea sured channel power Note that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio stand ards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 0 to 100dB limit for the lower and the upper alternate lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 0 DB Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30
49. Composite EVM The 3GPP specification defines the composite EVM measurement as the average square deviation of the total signal An ideal reference signal is generated from the demodulated data The test signal and the reference signal are compared with each other The square deviation yields the composite EVM 1 Test setup a Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSVR b Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSVR to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors c Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSVR EXT TRIG GATE to the external trigger output on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU PRESET LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 2 1175 GHz a DIGITAL STD b LINK DIRECTION UP REVERSE c TEST MODELS NOT STANDARDIZED d C D960K e SELECT BS MS f MS 10N g OVERALL SYMBOL RATE 6 960 h STATE ON 3 6 Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error 3 Settings on the R amp S FSVR PRESET CENTER 2 1175 GHz REF 10 dBm 3GPP FDD UE TRIG EXTERN RESULTS COMPOSITE EVM 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSVR The following is displayed e Screen A Code domain power of signal branch Q e Screen B Composite EVM EVM for total signal Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error The peak
50. Emission Mask to the default setting CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum VALue lt Power gt This command activates the manual limit line selection and specifies the expected power as a value Depending on the entered value one of the predefined limit lines is selected Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Power gt 33 28 0 33 P233 28 28 P 33 0 P lt 28 RST 0 Example CALC LIM ESP VAL 33 Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit line for P 33 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem The commands of the CALCulate MASK subsystem configure the frequency mask trig ger Programming example TRIG SOUR MASK Selects the frequency mask as a trigger source MMEM MDIR C R_S instr freqmask MyMasks CALC MASK CDIR MyMasks Creates a directory on C called FreqMasks and selects it as the frequency mask directory Defining the shape of a lower frequency mask CALC MASK NAME MyMask CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Creates or loads a frequency mask called MyMask CALC MASK COMM Customized Frequency Mask Adds a comment to the frequency mask TRIG MASK COND ENT Triggers the measurement when the signal enters the frequency mask CALC MASK MODE ABS Selects absolute power level values CALC MASK LOW 10MHZ 10 4MHZ 10 4MHZ 20 4MHZ 20 4MHZ 10 10MBZ 10 Defines a lower frequency mask wi
51. FUNCtion POWer SEL Ct cc0ccccesesecesceeceesecesseeeeeeeees 130 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESulIt cccccsssceceescceseeseeeenes 131 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHon ZO0OM nennen nnns asses nn nsns s nsn nn snas 133 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh This command sets the marker to channel 0 This command is only available in code domain power and code domain error power result diagrams Se window depends on the selected display mode for which the marker is to be valid lt m gt marker number only 1 allowed Example CALC MARK FUNC CPIC Mode WCDMA Manual operation See CPICH on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch This command sets the marker to the position of the PCCPCH This command is only available in code domain power and code domain error power result diagrams Se window depends on the selected display mode for which the marker is to be valid lt m gt marker number only 1 allowed Example CALC MARK FUNC PCCP Mode WCDMA Manual operation See PCCPCH on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the result of the performed power measurement in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If necessary the measurement is switched on prior to the query The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured
52. K73 SENSe CDPower LCODe TYPE lt Type gt This command switches between long and short scrambling code Parameters lt Type gt LONG SHORt RST LONG Example CDP LCOD TYPE SHOR Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Type on page 48 SENSe CDPower L CODe SEARch IMMediate This command automatically searches for the scrambling codes that lead to the high est signal power The code with the highest power is stored as the new scrambling code for further measurements Searching requires that the correct center frequency and level are set The scrambling code search can automatically determine the primary scrambling code number The secondary scrambling code number is expected as 0 Alternative scrambling codes can not be detected Therefore the range for detection is 0x0000 Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always O If the search is successful PASS a code was found and can be queried using SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARCh LIST Parameters Status PASSed Scrambling code s found FAlLed No scrambling code found Example SENS CDP LCOD SEAR Searches the scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power and returns the status of the search Usage Query only Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Auto Scrambling Code on page 77 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch LIST This command returns the automatic search sequence see SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 174 SENSe s
53. K73 channel power relative IQIMbalance IO imbalance PSYMbol Number of pilot bits ACHannels Number of active channels MPIC average power of the inactive codes for the selected slot Example CALC MARK FUNC WCDP RES PTOT Usage Query only Mode WCDMA MS Manual operation See Result Summary on page 59 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM State If marker zoom is activated the number of channels displayed on the screen in code domain power and code domain error power result diagram is reduced to 64 The currently selected marker defines the center of the displayed range Suffix n irrelevant m 1 4 marker number Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC ZOOM ON Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Marker Zoom on page 73 8 2 6 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 8 2 6 1 CALCulate DELTamarker subsvstem cece teeter eeeeeetneee O 134 0262 CALCulate LIMit subsystem dente tetti iaceo et pee et uoces 141 8 2 6 3 CALOulate LIMit ESPectrum subsvstem emen 148 026 4 CALCulate Ee 152 82 65 CALCulate PSE SubSyStem iE dece tb tr ed e fu e E edes 158 8 2 0 5 CALCulate STATistics SUBSYSTEM A 160 8 2 6 7 Other Referenced CALCulate Commandes 164 8 2 6 1 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINE X ccsccceesceeceeseeesseeeeeeeeees 134 CA
54. LEFT ccccssscccescececescecesseeeceecceseaseesseeeeesaneeeaes 122 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT aaia sensn an 122 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimumf PDEAK 123 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzMAximumbRlGHt senes asses n nsns n ns aan 123 GALCulatesmn MARKersm MINiImum bEF T iactare itt nuoc eu n redox nona ii iaa 123 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz MiNimumNENT eese nennen nenas sse sni 124 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eee 124 CAL Culate nz M bker mmz MiNimum RI 125 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz POVerbRtEGuCbH Z sese e sensn na nnns 125 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe errante reete nennt nnne E EE Ia se eo dna 125 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz TR ACe 126 CAL Culatesti gt MARKETS MA EN 126 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XS lMitslGTaATel sse eene enne 127 CAL Culate nzM bkerzmz XG lMits Z0OONM nnne nnn na 127 CAL C late WIA RICE E EEN 128 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command all markers off including delta markers and marker measurement func tions Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode irrelevant Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Marker Off on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current position i e in desc
55. Otherwise a CDP measurement of the signal is not possible Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 175 Format Sync Scrambling Settings Switches the display format of the scrambling codes between hexadecimal and deci mal Remote command SENS CDP LCOD DVAL numeric value see SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 175 Type Sync Scrambling Settings Select whether the entered scrambling code is to be handled as long or short scram bling code Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe TYPE on page 174 Channel Detection Settings Opens the Channel Detection Settings dialog box Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Channel Detection Settings HS DPA UPA lt Channel Detection Settings If this option is selected it enables the application to detect HSUPA DPA channels and shows them in the channel table Remote command SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 172 Channel Search Mode Channel Detection Settings Select the channel search mode Either select Predef to use predefined tables or Auto for automatic detection of the channels Remote command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe on page 165 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 166 Predefined Tables Channel Detection Settings The list shows all available channel tables and marks the current active table or the table to edit Remote command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog on page 168 New
56. Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSVR is divided as follows Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help e Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduction to remote control is given The manual includes general information e g Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix Printer Interface Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSVR in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the soft ware options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are described here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Gui
57. Set to default Setting Refer to Frontend Frontend Settings on page 44 IQ Capture IQ Capture Settings on page 45 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Setting Descrambling Sync Search Despread ing Sync Scrambling Settings on page 48 Refer to Channel Detection Channel Detection Settings on page 48 Demodulation Evaluation Demod Settings on page 51 Display Configuration Frontend Settings chapter 7 1 1 Display Concept on page 39 This softkey opens the Frontend Settings dialog box to modify the following parame ters Frequency Settings Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Level Settings Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Preamplifier On e ott Adjust Ref Level Center Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s foenter E fmax SPAN pin 2 span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter z fmax fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 190 Frequency Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed value
58. Symbol Symbol Const Symbol EVM Bitstream Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 177 Select Branch Switches between the evaluation of the and the Q branch Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping on page 112 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP EDD UE Measurements 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer The display modes in this chapter are all based on the recording of the IQ Data With the same dataset of the recorded signal we can calculate the following display modes Therefore it is not necessary to restart the measurement to switch the display mode The following display modes and measurements specified by the 3GPP standard are available Code Domain POW SM ETT 55 Composite EVM RMS c cc cccccccsccceeecscecdeeededeeceeenedercsaauevecsedeuededeccteeesedtenadbessecedepeneseedes 56 Peak Code Domain E e EE 56 EVM vs le a a a a a Aa nates AAE E A AI Aaa ea aG 56 Mag Error vs CMD eiaei m 57 Phases Emot YS E on 58 Composite Constellation 0 v rrerrn r E Fere iaia a ee nn 58 Power yS Slot EE 58 Symbol Magnitude ET 59 Symbol Phase EE 59 ELL e EE 59 Code Domain Error POWOL ciere chm ninni t Rent NUR RR RR NER aaia eanan 61 GhannelT aple Meca n 61 POWGE VS SVMWOG E 63 SVMBOl CONSE AUOM E ET 63 vigore EVM DE 63 BCS Lu EE 63 RE 64 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot ciii enis eene t
59. This parameter is available only for the persistence spectrum result display WRITe Defines the persistence trace as the trace to put the delta marker on This parameter is available only for the persistence spectrum result display CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Parameters lt Position gt Example Manual operation Selects the measurement window Selects the marker 0 to maximum frequency or sweep time CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FUNC FIX STAT ON The command acti vates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured
60. attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 217 INPut EATT on page 216 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 210 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSVR between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 213 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu SWEEP key R amp S FSV K73 The menu of the SWEEP key contains options to switch between single measurement and continuous measurement and to control individual measurements Some softkey functions are not available in CDP mode Refer to the descriptio
61. axis Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer Value This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical mea surements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 1E 8 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 8 2 6 7 8 3 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Other Referenced CALCulate Commands CALC ulate lt i UNIT e Ct cecus ved uxo ga a agntcexee a tia Paca a aa cad oda eC tiic ta e ai hoe 164 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 92 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 This subsystem comprises the commands for configuring the code domain power mea surements Only the numeric suffix 1 is permissible in CONFigure CONFloure WCDbower MS ME AGurement nennen is En nnns 164 CONFloure WCDbower MS CTAbielSTATel eene 165 CONFigure WCDPawer OR EE 165 CONFigure WCDPower MS
62. channel power measurement with several car rier signals OBANdwidth OBWidth Measurement of occupied bandwidth CN Measurement of carrier to noise ratio CNO Measurement of carrier to noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band width Example CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP Switches on adjacent channel power measurement CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESult lt ResultT ype gt This command queries the measured and calculated results of the 3GPP FDD UE code domain power measurement Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Query parameters lt ResultType gt CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 PTOTal TFRame MACCuracy EVMRms CERRor SRATe CDPabsolute IQOFfset MTYPe RHO CMAPping FERRor TOFFset PCDerror EVMPeak CSLot CHANnel CDPRelative IQlMbalance PSYMbol ACHannels MPIC PTOTal total power TFRame trigger to frame MACCuracy composite EVM EVMRms error vector magnitude RMS CERRor chip rate error SRATe symbol rate CDPabsolute channel power absolute IQOFfset IO offset MTYPe modulation type BPSK I 0 BPSK Q 1 4PAM I 6 4PAM Q 7 NONE 15 RHO rho value for every slot CMAPping Channel component FERRor frequency error in Hz TOFFset timing offset PCDerror peak code domain error EVMPeak error vector magnitude peak CSLot channel slot number CHANnel channel number CDPRelative CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV
63. code domain error measurement is defined in the 3GPP specification for FDD signals An ideal reference signal is generated from the demodulated data The test signal and the reference signal are compared with each other The difference of the two signals is projected onto the classes of the different spreading factors The peak code domain error measurement is obtained by summing up the symbols of each difference signal slot and searching for the maximum error code 1 Test setup a Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSVR b Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSVR to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors c Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSVR EXT TRIG GATE to the external trigger output on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU PRESET LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 2 1175 GHz DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP LINK DIRECTION UP REVERSE TEST MODELS NOT STANDARDIZED C D960K SELECT BS MS MS 1 ON Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error OVERALL SYMBOL RATE 6 960 STATE ON 3 Settings on the R amp S FSVR PRESET CENTER 2 1175 GHz REF 0 dBm 3GPP FDD UE TRIG EXTERN RESULTS PEAK CODE DOMAIN ERR 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSVR The following is displayed e Screen A Code domain
64. dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are obtained Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ALT2 STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limi
65. dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Manual operation See Level Unit on page 79 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital UO Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 79 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 79 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital baseband IQ input signal is set automatically by the connected device if the currently used sample rate is provided indicated by the lt SampleRateType gt parameter in the result of the INPut DIQ CDEVice command This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 description of the base unit Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ SRAT AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS
66. defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency min span to fmax In analyzer mode the span range is 10 Hz to fmax For SEM and Spurious Emission measurements the minimum span 20 Hz RST fmax Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Manual operation See Stop on page 88 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt NumberSweeps gt This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep which are used for calculating the average or maximum value If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed Parameters lt NumberSweeps gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 GSM 200 PHN 1 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation See Sweep Count on page 69 SENSe SWEep POINts lt NumberPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one sweep Note For Spurious Emissions measurements the maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001 Parameters lt NumberPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 691 Example SWE POIN 251 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 106 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity lt Polarity gt This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level trigg
67. gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 208 Range Log 50 dB Range Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 208 Range Log 10 dB Range Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 208 Range Log 5 dB Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 208 RF Measurements Range Log 1 dB Range Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 208 Range Log Manual Range O
68. gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Example POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100 kHz Sets the spacing between TX channel and alternate adjacent channel 1 ALT1 from 40 kHz to 100 kHz In consequence the spacing between the TX channel and all higher alternate adja cent channels is increased by the factor 100 40 2 5 ALT2 150 kHz ALT3 200 kHz ALT4 250 kHz R Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 182 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel lt channel gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the TX channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 14 kHz to 20 GHz RST 20 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC CHAN 25kHz SENSe POWer HSPeed State This command switches on or off the high speed channel adjacent channel power measurement The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center fre quencies of the individual channels The command automatically switches to zero span and back Depending on the selected mobile radio standard weighting filters with characteristic or very steep sided channel filters are used for band limitation Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW HSP ON SENSe POWer NCORrection Mode This command turns noise cancellation on and off If noise cancellation is on the R amp S FSVR performs a reference measurement to deter mine its inherent
69. in the SENSe POWer subsystem To obtain a correct result a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed before a query is output Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt ResultType gt ACPower CPOWer ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement Results are output in the following sequence separated by com mas Power of transmission channel Power of lower adjacent channel Power of upper adjacent channel Power of lower alternate channel 1 Power of upper alternate channel 1 Power of lower alternate channel 2 Power of upper alternate channel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the num ber of adjacent alternate channels selected with SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN 96 the power is output in W If SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE is set to REL the adjacent alternate channel power is output in dB CPOWer Channel power measurement In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement the query returns the power result for the reference range if this power reference type is selected With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the channel power is output in the currently selected level unit
70. is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit for details on unit settings see the Unit softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 209 Noise Correction If activated the results are corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increa ses the dynamic range ON A reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolution bandwidth and level setting Therefore the cor rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen Noise cor rection must be switched on again manually after the change OFF No noise correction is performed RF Measurements AUTO Noise correction is performed After a parameter change noise cor rection is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement is performed Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 183 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSVR between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 213 Input 50 0 75 Q Uses 50 Q or 75 Q as reference impedance for the measured levels Default setting is 5
71. marker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated trace CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value Manual operation See
72. ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 185 Meas Time Auto lt Settings The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value of 100 ms Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer on page 184 Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 184 7 1 12 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 7 2 6 6 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements on page 106 TUE ADC PE 78 e 78 ele 78 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 L Input cci NEN RUNE TS 78 L Connected Device etn tnter enses ssa snas 78 EE TE EE 79 L3 P E 79 DIE BRL RR E RmRE 79 L Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 79 BAVA GD Mino EE 79 EX Ou EE 80 LEE 80 aid 01 MERE 8
73. n gt STATe State Activates deactivates the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP WIND3 STAT ON Turns on a third measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt or SENSe SWEep COUNt commands It should be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANk RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 6 4 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 33 Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switches on the calculat
74. necessary If marker 1 is activated its position becomes the reference point for the measurement The reference point can then be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X commands and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y independently of the position of marker 1 and of a trace It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe State This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and
75. noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled when ever one of these parameters is changed A corresponding message is displayed on the screen Noise correction must be turned on again manually after the change 8 5 3 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Mode gt ON Performs noise correction OFF Performs no noise correction AUTO Performs noise correction After a parameter change noise correction is restarted automati cally and a new correction measurement is performed RST OFF Example POW NCOR ON Manual operation See Noise Correction on page 95 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual SENSe ADJust ALL This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current measurement Example ADJ ALL Manual operation See Auto All on page 76 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the refer ence level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 Example For
76. off 8 2 6 5 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Before making any changes to a frequency mask you have to select one by name with CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Manual operation See Working with upper and lower lines on page 27 CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer DATA lt Frequency gt lt Level gt This command activates and defines the shape of the upper frequency mask trigger mask You have to select a mask before you can use this command with CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 The unit of the power levels depends on CALCulate lt n gt MASK MODE on page 156 If you are using the command with the vector network analysis option R amp S FSV K70 you can only use this command as a query Parameters lt Frequency gt N pairs of numerical values N is the number of data points lt Level gt the mask consists of Each data point is defined by the frequency in Hz and the amplitude in dB or dBm All values are separated by commas Note that the data points have to be inside the current span Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Manual operation See Positioning data points on page 29 See Automatic alignment of the frequency mask on page 29 CALCulate PSE subsystem CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbGtarcht lMMediatel nnne 158 CAL Culate nzP
77. off The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Note marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea surement results Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta mark ers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHZ CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK lt State gt This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt 1 irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC DELT LINK ON CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the n
78. overloaded although the trace is still signifi cantly below the reference level If the measured channel power equals the reference level the signal path is not overloaded Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Example POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Adapts the reference level to the measured channel power SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power for the relative measurement Example POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO Channel This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The transmission channel with the highest power the transmission channel with the lowest power or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be defined as a reference channel The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 130 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Channel gt MINimum MAXimum LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowermost transmission channel for t
79. page 213 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 216 Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Level defines the level that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 215 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 215 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 214 Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital UO input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 if available The information includes Device identification e Used port Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output transfer rates e Status of the connection protocol e Status of the PRBS descewing test R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP EDD UE Measurements Digital Baseband Info Digital IQ Input Connected Device SMU200A Ser
80. power measurement Adjacent Channel Power in the selected measurement window The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the first or the second alternate channel It should be noted that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALC LIM ACP ALT REL This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters RST 200DBM The first value is the limit for the lower and the upper alternate adjacent channel The second limit value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSE family Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt 1 11 gt ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the selected alternate adjacent channel in the selected measurement window for adjacent channel power measurement Adja cent Channel Power Before the command the limit check must be globally switched on for the channel adjacent channel power with the command CALC LIM ACP STAT ON The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the alternate channel The result can be queried with CALC LIM ACP ALT RES I
81. remote control 123 124 125 138 Next Min Mode abs Next Peak uo m reed reti lista coepere Next Peak remote control 122 123 125 137 138 139 Next Peak Mode eec Hee er thee 74 Noise GOEFeCtOn is tete tee terr ts 95 Noise Source Noise Src On Off remote control OBW remote control nnn 130 OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH 164 elei ie Y aq Peak remote control Ph Noise On Off remote control Ph Noise Ref Fixed remote control 135 136 Power POWER R amp S SUDDOTLt see rrt het rte ESA 81 Range Range Lin Unit Range Lin Unit remote control Range Linear 96 Range Linear 96 remote control Range Log remote control Range Log 1 dB Range Log 5 dB Range LOG 10 dB ee eere Range Log 50 GB zd Range Log 100 dB nemen ees Range Log Mantal irte RBWIVBW Mantl l 2 rnnt RBW VBW Noise 10 RBWI VBWPulse 1 rnt RBW VBW Sine 1 3 irte Ref Level remote control Ref Level Offset Ref Level Offset remote control 210 Ref Level Position Ref Level Position remote control Ref Point Frequency remote control 134 Ref Point Level remote control Ref Point Time remote control Ref Valle ero ette erige detiene ns Ref Value remote control
82. subsystem e SENSe subsystem except for the specific commands described in chapter 8 5 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 on page 170 e TRIGger subsystem Notation ote eege 109 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 esent 111 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower subsystem sss menn 112 CALCulate FEED subesvstem eee eene enne nnns 113 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower Gubevstem e 115 CALCulate MARKer subsuvstem eene enne nennen 121 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCTION subsvstem emm 128 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 133 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 esee 164 INSTrument subsystem eesseseeeseseeeeeeeee nennen enne ntn nnne nennen nn nennen 169 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 ccccccsscceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeeneas 170 SENSe CDPower SUBSYSTEM esses senten eene trennen snnt nn 170 SENSe POWer Subsystem vests sete iniit i eei ede e iua o de RE a a HR 178 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 184 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 8 6 STATus QUEStionable subsystem R amp S FSV K73 eene 195 8 6 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC subsystem R amp S FSV K73 sss 195 8 7 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 cccccccesssseeeeeseseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeseenenes 196 8 8 Other Commands Referenced in this Ma
83. subsystem R amp S FSV K73 No Start Stop lt Rbw gt lt Freq gt lt Levelabs gt lt Level rel gt lt Delta gt lt Limitcheck gt lt unused1 gt lt unused2 gt An array of values is returned for each range of the limit line lt value array of range 1 gt value array of range 2 gt lt value array of range n gt No number of the limit line range Start Hz start frequency of the limit line range Stop Hz stop frequency of the limit line range Rbw Hz resolution band width of the limit line range Freq Hz frequency of the power peak within the range Power abs dBm absolute power of the peak within the range Power rel dB relative power of the peak within the range related to channel power Delta dB distance to the limit line in dB positive indicates value above the limit fail Limitcheck 0 1 Limit check pass 0 fail 1 indicates whether the power is below 0 or above 1 the limit line Unused1 2 for future use Default unit Hz TRAC2DATA ATRACE2 Returns a list of absolute frequency errors for all slots in trace 2 screen B Query only WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA TPVSlot This command returns a list of absolute frequency errors vs slot for all slots In contrast to the scope presentation and the TRACE lt n gt parameter return value absolute values are returned The query is only possible in frame mode and not in slot mode regard
84. the description in the base unit CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 164 or CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 160 Query of results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt Trace gt on page 161 7 2 6 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K73 The following chapter describes the softkeys and menus available for RF measure ments in 3GPP FDD UE base station tests All menus not described here are the same as for the base unit see the description there 7 2 6 1 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is RF Measurements only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description EE 86 LEE 86 ERR MN PENNE NT 86 L 0 14 RBW Span gt EE 87 aieo dc o A MENT 87 Ur E Pt MINER T 87 L c Ci E 87 L x cC Dai EE 87 MES EE 87 Mab csc sae essences Saracens eee EE 88 eege 88 C MM 88 curo 88 Frequency OSOE isa nre ete e eth eee ue tatu ia 88 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 fcente
85. value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is activated if necessary The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Depending on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 73 8 2 0 2 CALCulate LIMit subsystem CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks ACPBowerACHannelAbBGolute ente 142 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks ACBowerACHannelAbBzoluteztate 142 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel REI ativel seenen esere eerersrsrsrsrnnnnne nnn 143 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks ACPBowerACHannelbREzut esee eene 143 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel REI ativelSTATe eese 144 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbower Al Temate Channel AbBGolute sess 145 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbower Al Temate chanmnezfREL ativel nenene 146
86. values move the mask upwards negative values shift the mask downwards Before making any changes to a frequency mask you have to select one by name with CALCulate n MASK NAME on page 156 Parameters Level Example Manual operation Defines the distance of the shift The shift is relative to the cur rent position Default unit dB See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 See Shifting mask points as a whole on page 29 CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer STATe State This command turns the lower frequency mask on and off Before making any changes to a frequency mask you have to select one by name with CALCulate n MASK NAME on page 156 Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 See Working with upper and lower lines on page 27 CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer DATA Frequency Level This command defines the shape of the lower frequency mask CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Before making any changes to a frequency mask you have to select one by name with CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 The unit of the power levels depends on CALCulate lt n gt MASK MODE on page 156 If you are using the command with the vector network analysis option R amp S FSV K70 you can only use this command as a query Parameters lt Frequency gt N pairs of numerical valu
87. 0 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes lt 200 50 lt 50 50 gt lt 50 70 gt UO 200 gt Query CALC LIM ESP LIM Response 200 50 50 70 200 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum MODE lt Mode gt This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of the limit line in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO MANUAL AUTO The limit line depends on the measured channel power MANUAL One of the three specified limit lines is set The selection is made with the chapter 8 2 6 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem on page 148 command RST AUTO Example CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive lt State gt This command sets the power classes used in the spectrum emission mask measure ment It is only possible to use power classes for which limits are defined Also either only one power class at a time or all power classes together can be selected Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined powe
88. 0 Q The setting 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 O adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 75 Q 50 Q All levels specified in this Operating Manual refer to the default setting of the instru ment 50 Q This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 218 YIG Filter On Off Activates or deactivates the YIG filter by means of relays or by bypassing the filter If the YIG filter at the input of the R amp S FSVR is removed from the signal path you can use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis However image frequency rejection is no longer ensured Note that the YIG filter is active only on frequencies greater than 7 GHz Therefore switching the YIG filter on and off has no effect if the frequency is below that value INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 217 7 2 6 4 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bandwidth menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is pro vided in the corresponding softkey description RF Measurements For Spurious Emission Measurements the settings
89. 1 m sh Mem 81 L Firmware Updale c petite tec etia e eder ob ete ed 81 TE EE 81 GR e i dest a Seen pag etal ni ah aca athe stance 81 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSVR between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 213 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSVR Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 223 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband UO the source can also be configured here Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 218 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on
90. 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 34 Auto on page 100 RF Measurements Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 194 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 194 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 194 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 187 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW lt 10k
91. 9 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel sesenta 180 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE 180 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO essen 180 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNL e eceiiieisi NENNEN ER nean 181 SENSE POW Srl RAC m 181 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet MCACpower sisse nre 182 ISENGe JPOWer ACHannel GbACngol ACHannell nenne 182 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel esses eene 182 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel eese 183 ISBNSETPOWerFISPebl 4 eoe dre Fee acts ete t ceca ada saddle ne redd 183 SENSe POWer NCOR ecIOD 2212 22 2 2 1 teneret tete uL oec tru E Lac epu EL EE peo Hye YR RH eS 183 SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs lt ChannelPairs gt This command sets the number of adjacent channels upper and lower channel in pairs The figure 0 stands for pure channel power measurement Parameters lt ChannelPairs gt 0 to 12 RST 1 Example POW ACH ACP 3 Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3 i e the adjacent channel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 are switched on SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the channel bandwidth of the specified TX channel in the radio communication system The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by this modification With SENSe lt source gt PO
92. 960K f STATE ON 3 Settings on the R amp S FSVR PRESET CENTER 2 1175 GHz AMPT 0 dBm MODE 3GPP FDD UE MEAS POWER Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emis sion Mask The 3GPP specification defines a measurement which monitors the compliance with a spectral mask in a range of at least 12 5 MHz about the 3GPP FDD UE carrier To assess the power emissions in the specified range the signal power is measured in the range near the carrier by means of a 30kHz filter in the ranges far off the carrier by means of a 1MHz filter The resulting trace is compared to a limit line defined in the 3GPP specification 1 Test setup Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSVR coaxial cable with N connectors 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU PRESET LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 2 1175 GHz DIGITAL STD a WCDMA 3GPP b SET DEFAULT c LINK DIRECTION UP REVERSE d TEST MODELS NOT STANDARDIZED e C D960K f STATE ON 3 Settings on the R amp S FSVR PRESET CENTER 2 1175 GHz AMPT 0 dBm MODE 3GPP FDD UE MEAS Spectrum Emission Mask 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSVR The following is displayed e Spectrum of the 3GPP FDD UE signal e Limitline defined in the standard e Information on limit line violations passed failed Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power 3 3 Measurement 3 Me
93. AN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined CREST factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor The required result is selected via the following parameters CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm CREST factor 13 69 dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the mea sured peak power in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Suffix n irrelevant Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RA
94. BNC connectors c Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSVR EXT TRIG GATE to the external trigger output on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU See chapter 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power on page 14 3 Settings on the R amp S FSVR See chapter 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power on page 14 In addition TRIG EXTERN 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSVR The following is displayed e Screen A Code domain power of signal channel configuration with 3 data chan nels on Q branch e Screen B Numeric results of CDP measurement e Trigger to Frame Offset between trigger event and start of 3GPP FDD UE frame The repetition rate of the measurement increases considerably compared to the repeti tion rate of a measurement without an external trigger 3 5 Measurement 5 Measurement of the Composite EVM Setting Trigger Offset A delay of the trigger event referenced to the start of the 3GPP FDD UE frame can be compensated by modifying the trigger offset 1 Settings on the R amp S FSVR TRIG gt TRIGGER OFFSET gt 100 us 2 Measurement on the R amp S FSVR The Trigger to Frame parameter in the numeric results table screen B changes Trigger to Frame gt 100 us Note A trigger offset compensates analog delays of the trigger event Measurement 5 Measurement of the
95. Blank esce eerte rent een 34 e Ee e 33 71 Max ONG EE 33 71 MONG EE 33 71 KE 34 72 trigger ele 47 70 Trigger Our D 47 70 Trigger Source External Cc P 4T 70 Trigger Source Free Run C cy 47 69 trigger to Tral fie oie otio tte ein m aeree erat 60 TX Settings E Tee 80 U Upper Level Hysteresis e 77 Upper case commands eese 110 V VBW RMS detector cts cael nite e no Video bandwidth View trace mode Z Zoom Amiplitude certc tr E ces 34 72
96. CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe 146 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ACbowert STA e eene anarai 147 EE BI TEE 147 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel during adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the lt UpperLimit gt upper adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe State This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent chan nel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power is performed Before the com mand the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement must be globally switched on using CALCulate l
97. CDA mode For all other measurements the settings are described together with the mea surement The softkeys are described in chapter 7 2 6 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K73 on page 85 All other menus are provided as described for the base unit For details refer to the cor responding menu descriptions To display help to a softkey press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help To close the help window press the ESC key For further infor mation refer to chapter 1 3 How to Use the Help System on page 8 Measurements and Result Diagrams The 3GPP user equipment measurement option provides Code Domain Measure ments and RF measurements listed below Code Domain Measurements The Code Domain Measurement option provides the following test measurement types and result diagrams which are available via the Display Config softkey or the Display Config button in the Settings Overview see Display Config on page 53 Measurements and Result Diagrams e Code Domain Power see Code Domain Power on page 55 Code Domain Channel Table see Composite EVM RMS on page 56 e Code Domain Result Summary see Result Summary on page 59 e Trace Statistics Avg Min Max in Code Domain Analyzer Mode see Result Sum mary on page 59 e Composite EVM see Composite EVM RMS on page 56 e Peak Code Domain Error see Peak Code Domain Error on page 56 Power vs Slot see Po
98. CTABle SELeGt i rci caste aaceeeentnnensestiaseneanes 166 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA ecessee aaa a nsns a 166 CONFloure WCDbower MS CTAble DATA HGDbech A eene 167 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent sess 168 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COPBY ioie oret eeis t eee vade emu bd ac ENEE EES 168 CONFloure WCDbower MS CTAble DEL ete sess ener nennen 168 CONFloure WCDbower MS CTAbBleCATalog NENNEN ERKENNEN En 168 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa sisse nennen nennen rnnt 169 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPOc essere 169 CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement Type This command selects the 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Type gt ACLR ESPectrum WCDPower POWer OBANdwith OBWidth CCDF ACLR Adjacent channel power measurement standard 3GPP WCDMA Forward with predefined settings ESPectrum Measurement of spectrum emission mask WCDPower Code domain power measurement This selection has the same effect as command INSTrument SELect POWer Channel power measurement standard 3GPP WCDMA For ward with predefined settings OBANdwith OBWidth Measurement of occupied power bandwidth CCDF Measurement of complementary cumulative distribution function RST WCDPower Example CONF WCDP MS MEAS POW Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe State Th
99. D UE signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power val ues with a spectral mask specified by 3GPP This measurement ist identical to the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement of the base unit By entering the measurement the configuration to measure the 3GPP standard will be loaded The following user specific settings are not modified on the first access following pre setting Reference Level Reference Level Offset RF Measurements e Center Frequency Frequency Offset Input Attenuation Mixer Level e All trigger settings SCPI command CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 164 7 2 3 Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Selecting of Adjacent Channel Power ACLR activates the adjacent channel power measurement in the default setting according to 3GPP specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio The R amp S FSVR measures the channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and of the alternate channels The results are displayed below the screen The following user specific settings are not modified on the first access following pre setting e Reference Level Reference Level Offset e Center Frequency Frequency Offset e Input Attenuation Mixer Level Alltrigger settings Pressing the Adjacent Channel Power softkey activates the analyzer mode with defined settings CHAN PWR ACP CP ACP ON CP ACP STANDARD W CDMA 3GPP FWD CP ACP CONFIG NO OF ADJ CHAN 2 To rest
100. DEAksearchlbGtarch AUTO 159 CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin eise esee enne nnne 159 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHOw e eceess niinniin 159 CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges sess 160 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate This command switches the spurious limit check off If you want to read out the values peak values including the delta to a limit you have to Switch on the limit again This command is only for FSP compatibility and not necessary to use on the R amp S FSVR CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC PSE Starts to determine the list CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin lt Margin gt This command sets the margin used for the limit check peak search Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt Margin gt 200 to 200 dB RST 200 dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHow This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffi
101. Downlink Measurement Application e R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSVR by replacing modules The manual includes the following chapters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Chapter 3 Repair Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSVR and all available options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is Conventions Used in the Documentation installed on the R amp S FSVR by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The cur rent release notes are provided in the Internet 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 2 1 Typographical Conventions The f
102. EE Lower Level Hysteresis e ET 77 Lower case commands essen 110 M marker PEAK ge TES Max Hold trace mode i maximutm Search ceci recen nir e enean noa obE Se Red ses Meas Interval Si p 52 menu E UE Te EE 85 Eer deet ege eent 88 SWEEP EE 103 Menu Amplitude 90 EL UL WEE 96 Min Hold trace mode 33 71 minimum Search annas aaia Redi dea 15 modulation pio pm 61 N Negative Peak detector ui rre eene 32 New Channel Table 48 No of Active Chan 60 Nocof Pilot Bilg rroia nosci oris 60 noise COMECHOMN EE 95 Source external 0 0 cece eceeseeeeeeeeesssteeeeeeeseeeeea 78 106 Normalize KII WEE 52 O occupied barndwidtl ent tete 84 offset MEQUENCY EE 44 65 88 reference l vel 1 5 2 ees EN 45 68 95 Offset lee EE 47 70 Online help Hee dis Kl LEE 8 Options ENEE 66 93 216 RF Preamplifier B22 45 66 93 e UE lan TEE 33 11 P Peak Code Domain Error ccn tret ct ries 228 PEAKSEARGLI ME 74 Ph Noise Auto Peak Search Ile ee lr e iecit n d aa 135 PilotL Pk CDE polarity external trigger un cote ete Rc Des E e 70 external trigger gate AA 47 trigger edge Positive Peak detector AA 32 power channel DOWGF racc tete oe tte DIS e power measurement power of 3GPP FDD UE SIGNAL esses 82 PICMG GSR secs oi roin va erext ripe diee pede is Preamplifier B22 Pwr Abs PwrRel ii tete abt ten
103. F Manual operation See Video BW Manual on page 98 See Video BW Auto on page 98 See Default Coupling on page 102 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the ratio between video bandwidth Hz and resolution band width Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command VBW RBW is reciprocal to that of the manual operation RBW VBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 01 to 1000 RST 3 Example BAND VID RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth 3 resolution bandwidth Manual operation See RBW VBW Sine 1 1 on page 100 See RBW VBW Pulse 1 on page 101 See RBW VBW Noise 10 on page 101 See RBW VBW Manual on page 101 See Span RBW Auto 100 on page 101 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring fre quency time domain Parameters lt Frequency gt Range 0 to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz Manual operation See Center on page 44 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Range 1 to fmax RST 0 1 x lt span value gt Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz Manual operation See CF Stepsize on page 64 See Ma
104. For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSVR displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 194 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 193 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSVR always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsify ing the signal The maximum level error is lt 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 194 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signa
105. Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSVR saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSVR saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the s
106. Hz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 187 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values O or 1 are set one Sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures 7 2 6 6 RF Measurements In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 193 Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected dur ing one sweep e Entry via rotary knob Inthe range from 101 to 1001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 100 points Inthe range from 1001 to 32001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 1000 points Entry via keypad All values in the defined range can be set The default value is 691 sweep points Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 193 S
107. IQ IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 109 Notation RT SFM SPECM Realtime mode Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 corresponding options are required D The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the basic unit For the other modes the Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these key words needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is inde
108. In this case the R amp S FSVR displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 194 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 193 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSVR always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsify ing the signal The maximum level error is 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 194 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep ing e Sweep on page 99 e FFT on page 100 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter
109. L Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHontlxedRbOnty 134 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe seen 135 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHonbhOise AUTO 135 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise S TATe cesse 136 CAL Gulate m DELETatiarker mod TEE 136 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT 137 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT ener nasse 137 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK esee 137 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzM Aimum HIGH 138 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 138 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMiNimumNENT esee sensa nene nans 138 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee 139 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 139 CAL Culate nz DE TamarkercmztSTATel ener nnne inan 139 CAL Culatesms DELTamarkersmo TRAGQG 1 2x22 ANNERES ENEE 140 GALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt X 2 cc sccseccctensceccsetsccnscetnanseccusetsceuecccanaseccucttaaeuaces 140 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative seen enne enne 141 CAL CulatesmsipDELTamarkersmo Y 2 2 roce tenet et nei air adu ce e breed 141 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X Reference This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines
110. LCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 124 Next Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 124 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 138 Next Min Mode Sets the mode for the Next Min softkey Three settings are available g Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum left to the marker of the selected trace abs Sets the active marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 gt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum right to the marker of the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MIN LEFT gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 138 CALC MARK MIN RIGH gt CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 125 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 139 CALC MARK MIN NEXT abs CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 138 7 1 11 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu AUTO SET Key R amp S FSV K73 The AUTOSET key opens a menu to configure automatic settings This chapter describes the softkeys available for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit AR
111. M STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The file format is described in chapter 6 4 7 ASCII File Export Format on page 37 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 222 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Trace gt 1 to6 selected measurement trace lt FileName gt DOS file name The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC OUTPut IF SOURce Source This command selects the source of the IF output Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Source gt IF Outputs the intermediate frequency OFF Turns off the output of a signal viDeo Outputs the video signal 200 mV RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF output connector Manual operation See Video Output on page 106 OUTPut TRIGger lt PortLevel gt This comm
112. N ERROR POWER Five values are transmitted for each code class 8 channel The channels are sorted according to the code numbers Format code class gt 1 code number gt 1 lt CDEP gt 1 channel flag gt 1 code class gt 2 code number gt 2 lt CDEP gt 2 channel flag gt 2 lt code class gt 256 lt code number gt 256 lt CDEP gt 256 lt channel flag gt 256 where lt Code class gt Highest code class of an uplink signal It is always set to 8 CC8 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 lt Code number gt Code number of the evaluated CC8 channel lt CDEP gt Code domain error power value of the CC8 channel dB lt Channel flag gt Indicates if the CC8 channel belongs to an assigned code channel e 0b00 0d0 CC8 is inactive e 0b01 0d1 CC8 channel belongs to an active code channel RESULT SUMMARY The following results are returned for each channel composite EVM 96 peak CDE dB gt carr freq Error Hz gt lt chip rate error ppm gt lt total power dB gt lt trg to frame s gt lt EVM peak channel gt lt EVM mean channel gt lt class gt lt channel number gt lt power abs channel dB gt lt power rel channel dB referred to the total power of the signal gt lt I Q component abs gt lt pilot length bits gt IQ offset gt lt IQ imbalance gt POWER VS SLOT 15 pairs of slot slot number of CPICH and level values for 15 slo
113. NEXT on page 137 Next Peak Mode Selects the mode of the Next Peak softkey Three settings are available lt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum left to the marker of the selected trace abs Sets the active marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the selected trace Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 gt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum right to the marker of the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MAX LEFT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 137 CALC MARK MAX RIGH gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 123 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 138 CALC DELT MAX NEXT abs CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 122 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 137 CPICH The CPICH softkey sets the marker to the CPICH channel The softkey is only availa ble for R amp S FSV K72 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 128 PCCPCH Sets the marker to the PCCPCH channel Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 128 Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace Remote command CA
114. NGe Value This command defines the level range for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the level range setting defined with the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe command Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 10dB to 200dB RST 100dB Example CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel lt Value gt This command defines the reference level for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel command With the reference level offset lt gt 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the offset The unit depends on the setting performed with CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Suffix n irrelevant CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Value gt 120dBm to 20dBm RST 20dBm Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer Value This command defines the lower limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical mea surements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix n selects the screen Parameters Value 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the scaling type of the y
115. NSe POWer ACHanneE MODE no rro Ern entren rent rn ene etn ecc a gcnere e grey SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet MCAOCpower eese nnne nennen rennen trennen SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESSERLEWVO6Ll rur treo orte no Cep sg iS REPE AER x ERR SEE SEN SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONGQE erret nnne indo nai SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO s SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel essent SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel essent SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannelg eese SENSe POWerACHannel TXCHannel OU NL eun ent ttt ee tmp etre e pn Eng nean er xe caveats SENSe POWer HSDP6ed E SENSe POWer NCORrection SENSe POWer TRACe SENSE SWEep i COUN Y EE SENSe SWEep EGATe PObLatity rm rette Cas rer tit b p prre E ONGe SENSE SWEEP POINTS e n EI EEN SENSE SWE TIME AUTO racine rm rene ra ee net er te hu he eee rari EES EE SENSE S WEG DT TYPE GALCulate n CDPower Mapplihg ia terrent treten trn ie tret her cr ner i eek n tnn CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz FUNGC on ElxedRbOmt XA 134 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOintY essent 134 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe essent 135 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNC
116. OA ebe eege teg ee ee sde 76 LUGIE Ue 76 Auto Re ele Be 77 SE 77 L Meas Time 3 oro ccsssciscscasssncessceavesdedeasdssaadacabnsnonssasyvasaciedsloasasasabsdescvsasnanaanes TT L Meas Time JM acere itia os Cea EE La ei oes ina 77 E Upper Level Hysteresis super e 77 EE 77 Auto All Performs all automatic settings e Auto Level on page 76 e Auto Scrambling Code on page 77 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 184 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings soft key Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 185 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Auto Scrambling Code This softkey starts a calculation on the recorded signal with all scrambling codes The scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power is chosen as the new scram bling code Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 174 Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Possible settings are e Meas Time Manual on page 77 e Meas Time Auto on page 77 Meas Time Manual Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 76 The default value is 1
117. Parameters lt SignalComponent gt l Q RST Q Example CDP MAPP Q Mode CDMA WCDMA SENSe CDPower NORMalize boolean This command activates or deactivates the elimination of the IQ offset from the signal Parameters ON OFF gt RST OFF Example CDP NORM ON Activates normalization Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Normalize on page 52 SENSe CDPower OVERview State This command switches to an overview display of a code domain measurement CDP rel CDP abs CDEP If enabled the branch of the code power is displayed in screen A and the Q branch in screen B Both results can be read using TRACE DATA TRACE1 and TRACE DATA TRACE2 respectively If disabled screen A displays the branch and screen B provides the result summary display Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP OVER OFF Mode CDMA EVDO WCDMA SENSe CDPower PDIsplay Mode This command switches between showing the absolute or relative power to the chosen reference This parameter only affects the display mode code domain power Parameters lt Mode gt ABS REL RST ABS Example SENS CDP PDIS ABS SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Code Power Displ on page 52 SENSe CDPower QINVert lt State gt This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q c
118. R amp S FSV K73 Firmware Option 3GPP FDD UE Measurement Operating Manual MERION IONET 1176 7590 02 03 1 remen Test amp Measu Operating Manual This manual describes the following options e R amp S FSV K73 1310 8555 02 The contents of this manual correspond to the following R amp S FSVR models with firmware version 2 23 or higher R amp S FSVR7 1311 0006K7 R amp S FSVR13 1311 0006K13 R amp S FSVR30 1311 0006K30 R amp S FSVR40 1311 0006K40 The software contained in this product makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV R amp S9FSVR is abbreviated as R amp S FSVR R amp S FSV K73 Contents WR al o es ee eee ee eee 5 1 1 Document
119. RENCE EXT Measurement on the R amp S FSVR The displayed frequency error should be lt 10 Hz Note o The reference frequencies of the analyzer and of the DUT should be synchronized Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power Setting Behaviour with Deviating Center Frequency Setting In the following the behaviour of the DUT and the analyzer with an incorrect center fre quency setting is shown 1 Test setup Tune the center frequency of the signal generator in 0 5 kHz steps and watch the analyzer screen 2 Measurement on the R amp S FSVR a A CDP measurement on the analyzer is still possible with a frequency error of up to approx 1 kHz Up to 1 kHz a frequency error causes no apparent differ ence in measurement accuracy of the code domain power measurement b Above a frequency error of 1 kHz the probability of an impaired synchroniza tion increases With continuous measurements at times all channels are dis played in blue with almost the same level c Above a frequency error of approx 2 kHz a CDP measurement cannot be per formed The R amp S FSVR displays all possible codes in blue with a similar level 3 Settings on the R amp S SMU FREQ 2 1175 GHz a Set the signal generator center frequency to 2 1175 GHz again FREQ 2 1175 GHz Note The analyzer center frequency should not differ from the DUT frequency by more than 2 kHz Setting Behaviour with Incorrect Scrambling Code A valid CDP m
120. REQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 191 0 5 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 190 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 191 0 5 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the resolution bandwidth Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 190 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 191 x Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 190 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 190 x RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage 96 of the resolution bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK
121. REQuency STOP on page 192 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 191 7 2 6 2 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Span menu for RF mea surements except for Power measurements RF Measurements CN E 89 SWESMUME TEE 89 Eje A E E n 89 AGS EE 90 Span Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span The center frequency remains the same when you change the span The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 SpaNnmin S f span S f max fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 192 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjus
122. Range Log 10 dB on page 91 See Range Log 5 dB on page 91 See Range Log 1 dB on page 92 See Range Log Manual on page 92 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SYSTem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Grid Abs Rel on page 95 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix n irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value the unit depends on the result display RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units for example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display Mode CDMA BT EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Y per Div on page 66 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value
123. STATe lt State gt This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF On activating this function the APD measurement is switched off Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples lt NoMeasPoints gt This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statisti cal measurement functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt NoMeasPoints gt 100 to 1E9 RST 100000 Example CALC STAT NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command resets the scaling of the X and Y axes in a statistical measurement The following values are set x axis ref level 20 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC STAT PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt Trace gt lt ResultType gt This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt Trace gt 1 6 trace Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN PEAK CFACtor ALL ME
124. See Next Min Mode on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace minimum If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Min on page 75 See Next Min Mode on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode if necessary If no minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Usage Event Manual operation See Min on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X direction If no ne
125. Wer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 35 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example POW ACH BWID CHAN2 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel 2 to 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio transmission system If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the band widths of all alternate adjacent channels are automatically set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 35 Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ACH 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the specified alternate adjacent chan nels of the radio transmission system If the channel bandwidth of one alternate adja cent channel is changed e g channel 3 the bandwidth of all subsequent alternate adjacent channels e g 4 11 is automatically set to the same valu
126. XPOW CDEPower Result display of code domain error power as bar graph XPOW CDP Result display of code domain power as bar graph absolute scaling XPOW CDP ABSolute Result display of code domain power as bar graph absolute scaling XTIM CDP BSTReam Result display of bit stream XTIMe CDP CHIP EVM Result display error vector magnitude EVM versus chip XTIMe CDP CHIP MAGNitude Result display magnitude error versus chip XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHASe Result display phase error versus chip XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation Result display of composite constellation XTIM CDP ERR CTABle Result display of channel assignment table XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain Result display of peak code domain error XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary Result display in tabular form XTIM CDP FVSLot Result display of frequency error versus slot XTIM CDP MACCuracy Result display of composite EVM error vector magnitude refer enced to the overall signal XPOW CDP OVERview 8 2 3 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Result display of code domain power ratio as bar graph relative scaling XTIM CDP PSVS Result display of phase discontinuity versus slot XTIM CDP PVSLot Result display of power versus slot XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute Result display of power versus slot absolute scaling XTIM CDP PVSLOot RATio Result display of power versus slot absolute scaling XTIM CDP PVSYmbol Result display of power versus symbol XPOW CDP RATio Result d
127. ak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level Further Information This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sample detector is used see chapter 6 4 3 Detector Overview on page 32 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSVR automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace
128. amp S FSV K73 It covers operation via menus and the remote control commands for the 3GPP FDD UE user equipment test This part of the documentation consists of the following chapters chapter 3 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 on page 11 Explains some basic 3GPP FDD user equipment tests chapter 4 Setup for User Equipment Tests on page 20 Describes the measurement setup for user equipment tests chapter 5 3GPP FDD UE Test Models on page 22 Gives an overview over the test models with different channel configurations chapter 6 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements on page 24 Describes the instrument functions of 3GPP user equipment measurements chapter 7 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements on page 38 Contains a detailed description of the possible user equipment test measurements as a reference for manual operation This chapter also presents a list of remote control commands associated with each function chapter 8 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 on page 108 Describes all remote control commands defined for the code domain measure ment An alphabetic list of all remote control commands are provided at the end of this document chapter 9 Error Messages on page 227 Contains device specific error messages for R amp S FSV K73 chapter 10 Glossary on page 228 Contains an explanation of terms related to measured quantities of the code domain measurement
129. ample detector is used see chapter 6 4 3 Detector Overview on page 32 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSVR automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 7 1 9 Softkeys of the Marker Menu MKR key R amp S FSV K73 The MKR key opens a submenu for the marker settings Markers are not available for the following result diagrams e Result Summary Channel Table In all other result diagrams up to four markers can be activated The following softkeys are available for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit 7 1 10 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 En TZO DEE 73 Marker Norm Dela ren rl e
130. an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 77 SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 77 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation Duration This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON Parameters Duration numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Manual operation See Meas Time Manual on page 77 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure ment You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted see SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYST
131. and carrying out corrections These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition i e following the SENSe subsystem Note that most commands in the CALCulate subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 8 2 1 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower subsystem sse nnns 112 8 2 2 CALCulate F EED s bsystem deer encanto erac 113 8 2 3 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower Gubeystem 115 8 2 4 CALCulate MARKer subevstem eene 121 8 2 5 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtION subsvstem 128 8 2 6 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 133 8 2 6 1 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem sss eene eene 134 8 2 6 2 CALCulate LIMit subsystem oet tette tear aa ecu nia EEN 141 8 2 0 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subevystem eene 148 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Gubsvstenm mener 152 8 2 0 5 CALCulate PSE aubevstem eene 158 8 2 0 6 CALCulate STATistics subsvstem eene 160 8 2 6 7 Other Referenced CALCulate Commandes 164 8 2 1 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower subsystem CAL Culate nz CDowerMapnping enne enne nnn en nre ne nhan nnn nnns 112 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping lt SignalBranch gt This command adjusts the mapping for the result displays Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt SignalBranch gt Q AUTO l The I branch of the signal will be used for evalu
132. and selects level of the Trigger Out port Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example Parameters lt PortLevel gt LOW HIGH RST LOW Example OUTP TRIG HIGH Manual operation See Trigger Out on page 107 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt State gt In remote control mode this command switches on or off the instrument display If switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote control Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON 9 Error Messages Error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system in the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor A short explanation of the device specific error messages for R amp S FSV K73 is given below Status bar message Description Sync not found This message is displayed if synchronization is not possible Possible causes are that frequency level scrambling code Invert Q values are set incorrectly or the input signal is invalid Sync OK This message is displayed if synchronization is possible Incorrect pilot symbols This message is displayed if one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pilot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible causes a
133. are defined in the Sweep List dia log see the description in the base unit Bandwidth settings are only available for RF measurements Ee EI 97 Ine SE IP EE 97 WIGS BW SIUE TD T CULTE DITE 98 video ET 98 Sweeptime Manual TT 98 WECM AWO GET 99 ee EE 99 Eet eege 99 E af e HN Tene Here EE 100 lr n TTE 100 L FFT Filter Mode 100 Uo pluie 100 L Namrow 100 Coupling RatiO DEE 100 L RBWIVBW Bibeltil ue het rz bein ir dnacadaslatabsdnuaudacaseeneacdates 100 L RBW VBW Pulse 31 101 L RBW VBW Noise TO 101 L REW VBW Mantal E 101 L Span RBW Auto DOC cesis ditednc ta ta tren ek Et dead d 101 L Span RBW Maus sida de d aia 102 L Default Coupling eccentric 102 Pallet Wy PO e EEN EEN EE 102 Res BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 34 Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DNARROW key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down wards The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the RBW display in the channel bar This softkey is available for all RF measurements except for Power m
134. arker 3 or switches to marker mode Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 73 See Marker Norm Delta on page 73 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment In the persistence spectrum result display the command also defines if the marker is positioned on the persistence trace or the maxhold trace Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt Trace gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on MAXHold Defines the maxhold trace as the trace to put the delta marker on This parameter is available only for the persistence spectrum result display WRITe Defines the persistence trace as the trace to put the delta marker on This parameter is available only for the persistence spectrum result display Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis If marker 2 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker it is switched to marker mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Parameters lt Position gt Example Manual operation CALCulat
135. asurement of the Relative Code Domain Power A code domain power measurement on one of the channel configurations is shown in the following Basic parameters of CDP analysis are changed to demonstrate the effects of non signal adapted values 1 Test setup Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the analyzer to the reference output REF on the rear panel of R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU See chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 Settings on the R amp S FSVR See chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 in addition SETUP REFERENCE EXT Measurement on the R amp S FSVR Frequency error The displayed frequency error should be lt 10 Hz Setting Synchronization of the Reference Frequencies Synchronization of the reference oscillators both of the DUT and the analyzer strongly reduces the measured frequency error 1 Test setup Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the analyzer to the reference output REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU See chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 Settings on the R amp S FSVR See chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 in addition SETUP REFE
136. ation Q The Q branch of the signal will be used for evaluation AUTO The branch selected by the dialog Selected Channel will be used for evaluation RST AUTO Example CALC CDP MAPPING AUTO Mode CDMA WCDMA Manual operation See Select Branch on page 54 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem The CALCulate FEED subsystem selects the result display for the different screens in the code domain analyzer This corresponds to the result display selection in manual operation LG Clic Cele ee ed EE 113 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Evaluation gt This command selects the evaluation mode for the different screens For a description of the evaluation modes see chapter 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams on page 24 Suffix lt n gt window CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Evaluation gt XPOW CDP XPOW CDP ABSolute XPOW CDP RATIio XPOW CDP OVERview XPOWer CDEP XTIMe CDPower CHIP EVM XTIMe CDPower CHIP MAGNItude XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHASe XTIM CDP ERR SUMM XTIM CDP ERR CTABlOe XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain XTIM CDP MACCuracy XTIM CDP PVSYmbol XTIM CDP COMP CONSGtellation XTIM CDP FVSLot XTIM CDP PVSLor XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute XTIM CDP PVSLOot RATio XTIM CDP BSTReam XTIM CDP SYMB CONGIellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM XTIMe CDPower SYMBOI EVM PHASe XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM MAGNitude XTIM CDP PSVS
137. ation OVGIVICW caiiii ccccciiscescectedscstecevencxetessnedsnneeeced scnnecuveesatedenssccesecneeeseeee sets 5 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation esee 7 1 3 How to Use the Help System seeeeeeeeeeeeee nnne enne nnne nennen 8 2 Dg e 10 3 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 s 11 3 1 Measurement 1 Measurement of the Signal Channel Power 12 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask 13 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power 14 3 4 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power 16 3 5 Measurement 5 Measurement of the Composite EVM 17 3 6 Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error 18 4 Setup for User Equipment Tests eeeeeeesesseees 20 5 3GPP FDD UE Test Models eterne dite rap eegege Geer eE Das 22 6 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements 24 6 1 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 24 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams eese 24 6 3 Working with the Frequency Mask Trigger eene en 26 6 4 Further Information cccccccc
138. ation Type Indicates the modulation type of the selected channel Valid entries are BPSK for channels on branch I BPSK Q for channels on branch Q and NONE for inactive channels Chan Power Rel Channel relative referred to the total power of the signal Symbol EVM Peak or average of the results of the error vector magnitude measurement The measurement provides information on the EVM of the channel marked red in the CDP diagram in the slot marked red of the power versus slot diagram at the symbol level RCDE Relative Code Domain Error for the complete frame of the selected channel Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 113 Query of results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESult on page 131 T Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Error Power is the difference in power between the measured and his ideal signal The unit is dB There are no other units for the y axis Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCD see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 113 Channel Table The Code Domain Channel Table display mode shows the channel assignment table The channel assignment table can contain a maximum of 512 entries corresponding to the 256 codes that can be assigned within the class of spreading factor 256 both and Q components The upper part of the tabl
139. ation after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 221 Trigger Offset IQ Capture Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 220 Sync Scrambling Settings Opens the Descrambling Sync Search Settings dialog box Descrambling Sync Search Settings x Scrambling Code Settings Format e Hex p Dec Type e Long Short Scrambling Code Sync Scrambling Settings Define the scrambling code in the specified format The entered scrambling code has to be identical to that of the signal
140. be defined with command CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME and the values of the table have to be defined with com mand CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA Parameters Comment Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COPY lt FileName gt This command copies one channel table onto another one The channel table to be copied is selected with command CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME The name of the channel table may contain a maximum of 8 characters This com mand is an event which is why it is not assigned an RST value and has no query Parameters lt FileName gt lt file_name gt name of the new channel table Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DEL Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored on the hard disk Syn tax of output format Sum of file lengths of all subsequent files free memory on hard disk 1st file name 1st file length gt lt 2nd file name gt lt 2nd file length gt lt nth file name gt nth file length Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB CAT Usage Query only Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Predefined Tables on page 49
141. ccording to the formula levelmixer level RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 63 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 212 RF Measurements RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 212 EI Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Au
142. ces are NOT filled This measurement displays Power versus Symbol for one single channel and for one single slot Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVSY see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 113 Symbol Constellation The Symbol Const measurement shows QPSK or BPSK modulated signals of the selected channel and the selected slot QPSK constellation points are located on the diagonals not x and y axis of the constellation diagram BPSK constellation points are always on the x axis If possible the display should use more than just 1 pixel per value as in the minimum case only 12 symbols are available This improves the visibil ity Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CONS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED sub system on page 113 Symbol EVM The Symbol EVM display mode shows the error between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal in percent for the selected channel and the selected slot A trace over all symbols of a slot is drawn The number of symbols is in the range from 12 min to 384 max It depends on the symbol rate of the channel Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 113 Bitstream The Bitstream measurement displays the demodulated bits of a selected channel for a given slot Depending on the symbol rate the number of symbols within a slot can vary from 12 min t
143. channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH CDP Relative Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 31 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements 6 4 3 Status Confilct Detector Overview The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSVR The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation The detectors of the R amp S FSVR are implemented as pure digital devices They collect signal power data within each measured point during a sweep The default number of sweep points is 691 The following detectors are available Table 6 1 Detector types Detector Indicator Function Auto Peak Ap Determines the maximum and the minimum value within a measurement point not available for SEM Positive Peak Pk Determines the maximum value within a measure ment point Negative Peak min peak Mi Determines the minimum value within a measure ment point RMS Rm Determines the root mean square power within a measurement point Average Av Determines the linear average power within a mea surement point Sample Sa Selects the last value within a measurement point The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed as the power value at this measurement point
144. command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM on page 133 All Marker Off Switches all markers off It also switches off all functions and displays that are associ ated with the markers delta markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 122 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu MKR key R amp S FSV K73 The MKR key opens a submenu for marker functions The menu is not available for the all result displays Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 The following softkeys are available for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Select e E 74 EE E 74 Next TEE 74 Next Peak MOOG EE 74 e ler EE 75 8101 0 ees de 75 PUN EE 75 TE ei UW 75 NEKEM MOGE Seen erre f dre tH arde Ore verit n ETE P Oc Per ste 75 Select 1 2 3 4 A Selects the normal marker or the delta marker and activates the marker A stands for delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 128 Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 123 Next Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 122 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum
145. command defines a comment for the frequency mask that you have selected with CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 Parameters Comment String containing the comment for the frequency mask Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Manual operation See Labelling a frequency mask on page 27 CALCulate lt n gt MASK DELete This command deletes the currently selected frequency mask Before making any changes to a frequency mask you have to select one by name with CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Mask on page 30 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer SHIFt X lt Frequency gt This command shifts the lower frequency mask horizontally by a specified distance Positive values move the mask to the right negative values shift the mask to the left Before making any changes to a frequency mask you have to select one by name with CALCulate n MASK NAME on page 156 Parameters Frequency Example Manual operation Defines the distance of the shift Default unit Hz See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 See Shifting mask points as a whole on page 29 CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer SHIFt Y Level This command shifts the lower frequency mask vertically by a specified distance Posi tive
146. continue measure ments using max hold or averaging functions In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the mea surement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin gle sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 69 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous State This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated contin uous or performs single measurements single Other Commands Referenced in this Manual The sweep is started immediately Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Mode all Manual operation See Continuous Sweep on page 68 See Single Sweep on page 69 INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum This command start
147. cture in the base unit description Boolean This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 numeric value num These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e uP This keyword increments the parameter value DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result arbitrary block program data This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data trans forming
148. de is expan ded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and programming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfa ces and error messages is also provided Documentation Overview In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSVR is not included in the option manuals The following Operating Manuals are available for the R amp S FSVR e R amp S FSVR base unit in addition R amp S FSV K7S Stereo FM Measurements R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement e R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 11 e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100 K104 EUTRA LTE
149. defined display configurations gt Inthe Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box click Restore 7 1 2 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu R amp S FSV K73 The Code Domain Analyzer softkey opens the Code Domain Analyzer submenu SOUNGE OVEIVICW e 43 Frontend Settings EE 44 o c 44 L Frequency ON esse ori tinte lbs prelati e it bot m dM 44 D 1 e 44 x 1g 45 Biz 11919 MR E 45 Eu do PR MERE UNE DONUM E 45 IQ Capture SOminiQSs M 45 WWII E EE 46 1 Mme 46 L Analysis Made eenegen 46 L Frame TANIE NEU TM 46 at 00 1 MEME 47 L Trigger Source EE 47 L Trigger Source Free Rule tiit rp eer ado read kia pde s 47 L e EE 47 Ga Ce 47 Sync Scrambling SOMMS erare ea ieren e R T NT 48 lU e 48 lo ENEE 48 CN EE 48 Channel Detection Settifiqs 221 cuotas ree cesza paese qub ENEE teeta RS 48 Mar 5 HE 49 Geh 49 uu 027 tea a ante ntenean ia eaaadeatiades 49 IER 49 do Wette 50 o c NER 51 Bc cnc 51 L1 o or 51 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 PSION SS UNOS T EE 51 L Code Power dr EE 52 L EE 52 L feas Intervali E 52 L Eliminate Tail Chips 52 Display EE 53 Select Channel elena rir hn ie nnno kiida onodi senpia aisi ri
150. denotes the upper adjacent chan nel Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dB CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent chan nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Before this command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73
151. due 99 105 Sweep Count remote control sssss 193 Sweep Time remote control 193 Sweep Type unite terret tenses 99 104 Sweeptime Auto sssssssesssseee 99 104 Sweeptime Manual sseeeeceeeeeeen 89 98 103 Sweeptime Manual remote control 193 Trace Mode remote control sssssss 207 Trg Gate Source remote control Trigger Offset eee Migger OUT i rere eterne certe trc Video BW Aulo rere rris Video BW Manual MI OW tsa 05 eect Softkeys Lower Level Hysteresis e eee 77 Upper Level Hysteresis T A SPAN menu nere 88 Special characters 110 split screen a9 Cl gt Te 88 status display rhet eret eterne 62 Step size Center frequeriey ccn retener be 86 SLOP MEQUENCY RR 88 supply voltage external noise source 78 106 sweep eoi TR 69 105 Sweep Continue single sweep eeseeeese 69 103 Continuous 68 103 Ire 69 103 Time 89 98 103 I I omniu 103 Sweep time ell a EE 99 104 Symbol EVM 60 61 symbolrate C 60 62 sync search Settings EE 48 T TECI iita 82 timing offset 60 ei Re EE 60 Trace Clear Write niic dcn detects c 33 71 Trace mode Average 94 72
152. e sse 145 CAL CGulate nzLUlMitzks ACower Al Temate channelzfREI ativel 146 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe GALCulate n LIMitsk AGPower STATe tct trennt toner nep CAL Culatesn LIMitsks ESPectr mt blMIts oe orti ere carecen eere nena Ferrer CAL Culate nzLlMitzksEGbechum MODE A CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt o CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class LIMit S TATe eeeeenenene CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MAXimum sss CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MlINimum essere CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class EXCLusive esee CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTore CALC ulate n LIMitsk ESPectrumt VAI tie oerte creek dU ttp etre ei etae GAL Gulatesn bIMitsko TEE 147 CALCulate n LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute sss 117 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe 118 CAL Culate nzLIMm AChowerACHannel RE Su 118 CALCulate n LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RELative essen 116 CAL Culate nzLUIMu T ACower ACHannelf REI atvelG ATe 117 CAL CGulate nz UM ACbower Al Temate 1 jizAbBGolutezrAte 120 CALCulate n LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate 1 112 RESult
153. e With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 35 Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ALT2 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE Mode This command switches between absolute and relative adjacent channel measure ment The command is only available with span gt 0 and if the number of adjacent channels is greater than 0 For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured channel power using the command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute RELative ABSolute absolute adjacent channel measurement RELative relative adjacent channel measurement RST RELative Example POW ACH MODE REL Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and if required switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement This ensures that the signal path of the instrument is not overloaded Since the measure ment bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power measurements the signal path can be
154. e saved on exiting and are set again on re entering this measurement Level Parameters e RBW VBW e Sweep time e SPAN For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to the descrip tion in the base unit Remote CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 164 Query of results Remote CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 129 7 2 5 CCDF The CCDF softkey starts a measurement of the distribution function of the signal ampli tudes complementary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest fac tor are displayed For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user defin able length is recorded continuously in the zero span and the distribution of the signal amplitudes is evaluated RF Measurements The following user specific settings are not modified on the first access following pre setting e Reference Level Reference Level Offset e Center Frequency Frequency Offset Input Attenuation Mixer Level e All trigger settings Pressing the CCDF softkey activates the analyzer mode with defined settings CCDF TRACE1 DETECTOR SAMPLE BW RES BW MANUAL 10 MHz VIDEO BW MANUAL 5 MHz To restore adapted measurement parameters the following level parameters are saved on exiting and are set again on re entering this measurement Level Parameters e RBW e NO OF SAMPLES For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to
155. e 96 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Source gt RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF Example INP SEL RF Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Input Path on page 78 8 8 3 TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Mode All TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Mode all Other Commands Referenced in this Manual TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Value This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event Suffix l
156. e Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMU with option R amp S SMU B45 digital stand ard 3GPP options R amp S SMU B20 and R amp S SMU B11 required e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m BNC connector Basic Settings in Code Domain Measurement Mode In the default mode after a PRESET the R amp S FSVR is in the analyzer mode The fol lowing default settings of the code domain measurement are activated provided that the code domain analyzer mode is selected Parameter Setting Digital standard W CDMA 3GPP REV Sweep CONTINUOUS CDP mode CODE CHAN AUTOSEARCH Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Scrambling code 0 Measurement 1 Measurement of the Signal Channel Power Parameter Setting Threshold value 60 dB Symbol rate 15 ksps Code number 0 Slot number 0 Display Screen A Code Power Relative Screen B result Summary 3 1 Measurement 1 Measurement of the Signal Channel Power The measurement of the spectrum gives an overview of the 3GPP FDD UE signal and the spurious emissions close to the carrier 1 Test setup Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSVR coaxial cable with N connectors 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU PRESET LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 2 1175 GHz DIGITAL STD a WCDMA 3GPP b SET DEFAULT c LINK DIRECTION UP REVERSE d TEST MODELS NOT STANDARDIZED e C D
157. e attenuator to the reference level Manual operation See RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto on page 67 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSVR between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Example INP COUP DC Manual operation See Input AC DC on page 68 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the R amp S Digital UO Inter face R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify t
158. e dne Feo axe cH anco e duae 176 SENSeTODPawer OVERVIEW 2 2 ais icut Ein ete eae exo ee ent eee g ea etae ene nace ax ease quus 176 SENSe CDPowerPDIsplay ecce ctun n to enhn n bn kr nate b gne roh alt da EENS 176 ier El ee 177 SENSe CDPowet SFAGCIOF secrete 2 pioneer vua i aa E N eria an ATERATEN 177 E EIS BI Tec on M 177 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe CDPower BASE lt BaseValue gt This command defines the base of the CDP analysis Parameters lt BaseValue gt SLOT FRAMe SLOT Only one slot of the signal is analyzed FRAMe The complete 3GPP frame is analyzed RST FRAMe Example CDP BASE SLOT Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Analysis Mode on page 46 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number The code number refers to code class 8 spreading factor 256 Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Range 0 to 255 RST 0 Example SENS CDP CODE 128 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Select Channel on page 53 SENSe CDPower ETCHips lt State gt This command selects length of the measurement interval for calculation of error vec tor magnitude EVM In accordance with 3GPP specification Release 5 the EVM measurement interval is one slot 4096 chips minus 25 ys at each end of the burst 3904 chips if power changes are expected If no power changes are expected the evaluation length is one slot 4096 chips Parameters State
159. e ege 73 Et EEN 73 AIM T O EE 73 Marker 1 2 3 4 Selects the corresponding marker and activates it Marker 1 is always a normal marker After Marker 2 to 4 have been switched on they are delta markers that are referenced to Marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value displays using the Marker Norm Delta softkey When Marker 1 is the active marker pressing the Marker Norm Delta softkey switches on an additional delta marker Pressing the Marker 1 to Marker 4 softkey again switches the corresponding marker off Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 128 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 140 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 141 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 141 Marker Norm Delta Changes the active marker to a normal norm or delta marker with respect to marker 1 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 139 Marker Zoom Activates or deactivates the zoom for the current active marker With the zoom func tion more details of the measurement signal can be seen This softkey can only be selected if at least one of the markers is activated Remote
160. e in CDP mode Refer to the description of the FREQ key in the base unit for information on the other softkeys available for RF mea surements CIE E e H 64 L SUI E 64 l requerioy OHSC EE 65 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 E foenter E fmax SE SPAN pin 2 span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter E fmax fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 190 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency d Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the cen ter frequency changes in steps of 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize This softkey is available for code domain and power vs time measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 190 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 191 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu
161. e indicates the DPCCH channel that has to be present in every signal to be analyzed Furthermore there are additional control channels used in HSDPA and HSUPA signals These channels HSDPCCH and EDPCCH are also dis played in the upper part of the table The lower part of the table indicates the data channels DPDCH and E DPDCH that are contained in the signal As specified in 3GPP the channel table can contain up to 6 DPDCHs or up to 4 E DPDCHs The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel numbers Therefore the unassigned codes are always to be found at the end of the table Physical channels used in 3GPP UPLINK signals according to Release 99 specifica tion DPCCH The Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to synchronize the signal It carries pilot symbols and is expected in the Q branch at code class 8 with code number 0 The channel is displayed in the upper part of the table DPDCH The Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data from the UE to the BS The code allocation depends on the total required symbol rate The following table represents the possible configurations of DPCH spreading factors and code allocation R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements HSDPCCH The High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel for HS DCH is used to carry control information CQI ACK NACK for downl
162. e subsystem R amp S FSV K73 8 6 STATus QUEStionable subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status reporting system for details refer to the remote control basics in the base unit description RST does not influence the status registers The STATus QUEStionable subsystem contains information about the observance of limits during adjacent power measurements the reference and local oscillator the observance of limit lines and limit margins and possible overloads of the unit The available remote commands are described in detail in the STATus QUEStionable subsystem in the base unit 8 6 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC subsystem R amp S FSV K73 This register contains information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis of the R amp S FS K73 option It can be queried with the following commands STATU s OUEStUonable SYNG CONDIGF T cic xni ua n d eaa eran b ed ha e eo xt rn neas 195 HR Uer ee de E EE 195 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis Return values lt Result gt If the result is ON an error occurred Details can be obtained using STAT QUES SYNC EVEN RST OFF Example STAT QUES SYNC COND Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CDMA EVDO STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt This command reads the information on the error situation in the code do
163. e subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Selects the marker Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 73 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off If the power measurement in zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range on the trace Suffix n m Parameters State Example Selects the measurement window marker ON OFF RST OFF CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM lt State gt This command sets the limits of the marker search range to the zoom area Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Parameters lt State gt Example irrelevant irrelevant ON OFF RST OFF CALC MARK X SLIM ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y lt Marke
164. easurement can be carried out only if the scrambling code set on the analyzer is identical to that of the transmitted signal 1 Test setup SELECT BS MS BS 1 ON SCRAMBLING CODE 0001 The scrambling code is set to 0000 on the analyzer 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU The CDP display shows all possible codes with approximately the same level 3 Settings on the R amp S FSVR Set scrambling code to new value MEAS CONFIG Sync Scrambling Settings Scrambling Code 01 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSVR 3 4 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power The CDP display shows the test model again Note The scrambling code setting of the analyzer must be identical to that of the measured signal Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a sec tion of approximately 20 ms of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary moment to detect the start of a3GPP FDD UE frame in this section Depending on the position of the frame start the required computing time can be quite long Applying an external frame trigger can reduce the computing time 1 Test setup a Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSVR b Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSVR to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with
165. easurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 187 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 186 Res BW Auto Couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span for span gt 0 If you change the span the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if you need the ideal resolution bandwidth in relation to a particular span RF Measurements This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 187 Video BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down wards The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the VBW display in the channel bar Note RMS detector and VBW If an RMS detector is used the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs How ever the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a lon ger sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS d
166. ed in Ref Level on page 44 Att Attenuation Freq Center frequency defined in Center on page 44 Channel Channel with spreading factor and mapping Slot Slot Power Code Power Display defined in Demod Settings on page 51 Capture Analysis Mode Slot Frame defined in IQ Capture Settings on page 45 e H MH Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 40 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 7 1 1 1 Overview of all measurement settings You can easily display an overview of all measurement settings using the Settings Overview on page 43 softkey In addition to the information in the diagram header each screen title contains dia gram specific trace information Screen focus One of the screens has a blue frame indicating the focus The screen focus can be changed just like in the base system The settings for trace statistics and markers can only be changed for the focussed screen Furthermore the focussed screen can be set to full screen for details see the R amp S FSVR Quick Start Guide Defining the display configuration 1 Select the Display Config softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer menu 2 Select the tab for the screen you want to configure A D 3 Select the Screen X active option to display the selected screen Tip SCPI command DISPlay WINDow lt n
167. eeceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeee aeaaea AEEA Ena AEREE EEEEEE EENEG 30 7 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 38 7 1 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 eene 39 2 REMeasuremenlts eie eege 82 8 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 108 8 1 NotatlOn oie xn nete ux anaapa Ra EnA ess ssdenescteedeteceveevessaczsaencuaee 109 8 2 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 essent 111 8 3 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 eene 164 8 4 INSTrument subsystem eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nenne nnnnn nennen nnn sn enirn nn nnn 169 8 5 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 eeeeeeeeessseeeeeee enne nnne nennen 170 8 6 STATus QUEStionable subsystem R amp S FSV K73 enne 195 wea Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 3 8 7 8 8 10 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 cccccssccecessseeceeeeseceeeeeeeeeaeseeeesnaaeeeeenseaeseeenenaes 196 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eee 206 apa 227 tr m 228 List of Commiands uieaacai etr rbV eEENPR CR URP E pEXREREAV XI aHa PER pR GU Eege 229 DNR C U 234 Documentation Overview 1 Preface 1 1 Documentation
168. elative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power dB The channel slot can be marked by the SELECTED CPICH slot timing offset gt Timing offset of the HS DPCCH to the frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips For all other data channels the timing offset is zero 0 2560 chips lt pilot length Pilot length of the DPCCH 0 to 8 symbols active flag Flag to indicate whether a channel is active 0 channel not active 1 channel active channel type Channel type indication 0 4 0 DPDCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel 1 DPCCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel 2 HS DPCCH High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Chan nel 3 E DPCCH Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel 4 E DPDCH Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel modulation type TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Modulation type of the code channel at the selected channel slot 2 Modulation type QPSK reserved for future use Example TRAC DATA CWCDp Returns a list of channel information for each channel in ascend ing order Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA LIST This command returns the peak list of the spectrum emission mask measurement list evaluation see also TRACe n DATA on page 203 Suffix n 1 4 window Return values lt Result gt Example Usage Mode TRACe
169. electing and configuring the parameters All other menus of the R amp S FSVR are adapted to the functions of the code domain measurement mode chapter 7 2 1 Output Power Measurements on page 82 Activates the channel power measurement with defined settings in the analyzer mode chapter 7 2 3 Adjacent Channel Power ACLR on page 83 Activates the adjacent channel power measurement with defined settings in the analyzer mode chapter 7 2 2 Spectrum Emission Mask on page 82 Compares the signal power in different carrier offset ranges with the maximum values specified by 3GPP chapter 7 2 4 Occupied Bandwidth on page 84 chapter 7 2 5 CCDF Activates the measurement of the occupied bandwidth analyzer mode Evaluates the signal with regard to its statistical characteristics distribution on page 84 function of the signal amplitudes Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 esee 39 BIO VEO o e e M 39 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu R amp S FSV K73 sssssss 42 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer sss 55 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu FREQ key R amp S FSV KT73 sssssssss 64 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 7 1 5 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu AMPT key R amp S FSV KT73 ssssssssss 65 7 1 6 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu SWEEP key R amp S FSV K73 sss 68 7
170. els Pilot length CDP rel 1 CDP rel 2 CDP rel 3 CDP rel 4 CDP rel 5 CDP rel 6 Code Class Code class of channel 1 I mapped Number of active channels 1to7 Pilot length Pilot length of channel DPCCH CDP rel 1 measured value of channel 1 only when queried CDP rel 2 measured value of channel 2 only when queried CDP rel 3 measured value of channel 3 only when queried CDP rel 4 measured value of channel 4 only when queried CDP rel 5 measured value of channel 5 only when queried CDP rel 6 measured value of channel 6 only when queried The Channel DPCCH may only be defined once If channel DPCCH is missing in the command it is automatically added at the end of the table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with the command CONF WCDP CTAB NAME Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA 8 0 0 5 1 0 00 4 1 1 0 1 0 00 4 1 0 0 1 0 00 The following channels are defined DPCCH and two data chan nels with 960 ksps Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPcch State This command activates ON or deactivates OFF the HS DPCCH entry in a prede fined channel table Parameters State RST ON Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA HSDP ON Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the selected channel table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to
171. en Navigating in the table of contents To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign To display a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the correspond ing help topic is displayed How to Use the Help System e To change to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics To scroll through a page use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys To jump to the linked topic press the link text on the touchscreen Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Select the suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Setthe zoom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window P Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel 2 Introduction This section contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSVR equipped with Application Firmware R
172. ency Masks To be able to reuse or edit a frequency mask that you have defined later you can save and restore particular frequency mask configurations The R amp S FSVR stores files that contain such configurations on its internal hard disk Save Mask The Save softkey opens a dialog box to save the current frequency mask configura tion in a file 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 4 7 6 4 1 Further Information If you do not name the file in the dialog box the R amp S FSVR names the file like the name of the frequency mask itself Load Mask The Load softkey opens a dialog box to restore a frequency mask The dialog box contains all frequency masks already on the hard disk of the R amp S FSVR Select the mask you need and confirm the selection with the Load but ton Remote command Path selection CALCulate lt n gt MASK CDIRectory on page 154 Load mask CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 Delete Mask The Delete softkey opens a dialog box to delete a previously saved frequency mask The Delete button deletes the file Note that you have to confirm the deletion process Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MASK DELete on page 154 Further Information short List of Abbrevlatlons ode ptas reet EENEG 30 Channels of the Code Domain Channel Table and Their Usage 31 BIET m 32 Trace Mode OVervi8wW 5 de etta tr taste dene ERR ERR NEESS
173. ending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the marker to the next smaller trace maximum If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak on page 74 See Next Peak Mode on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode If no maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selec
174. ent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with the CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute command This mechanism allows automatic check ing of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt O to 100dB the value for the lower limit must be lower than the lt UpperLimit gt value for the upper limit RST 0 dB Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper lower adjacent chan nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command pro duces a query error Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Return values Result The result is returned in the form lt result gt lt result gt where lt result gt PASSED FAILED and where the first returned value denotes the lower the second
175. ep time pretrigger max sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 220 Softkeys of the Trace Menu TRACE key R amp S FSV K73 The TRACE key is used to configure the data acquisition for measurement and the analysis of the measurement data The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Trace menu in 3GPP FDD UE Mode for Code Domain Analysis measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit CIGAR NV RIG sicsccdeeccaavesncsideasesaanwders sdairacaesasyavacaa sees EEE EE sass 71 DE HONG EEN 71 MARO asiento ret a ee teer EEN ce aon cede be c c 71 vcr HE 72 un M T S 72 Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t MODE on page 207 Max
176. ered signal Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS Manual operation See Trigger Polarity on page 70 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep time The range depends on the frequency span SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST automatic Example SWE TIME 10s Manual operation See Sweeptime Manual on page 89 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO State In realtime mode this command automatically sets the sweep time to 32 ms In analyzer mode this command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to the frequency span and bandwidth settings If SENSe SWEep TIME is used auto matic coupling is switched off Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time Manual operation See Sweeptime Manual on page 89 See Sweeptime Auto on page 99 See Default Coupling on page 102 SENSe SWEep TYPE Type This command selects the sweep type Parameters Type SWE Selects analog frequency sweeps AUTO Automatically selects the sweep type FFT or analog frequency sweep FFT Selects FFT sweeps RST AUTO Example SWE TYPE FFT Selects FFT sweeps Manual operation See Sweep on page 99 See FFT on page 100 See Auto on page 100 STATus QUEStionabl
177. eresis UPPer and SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Example ADJ LEV Manual operation See Adjust Ref Lvl on page 45 See Auto Level on page 76 SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt lt NoMeasurements gt This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average value Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been reached in continuous sweep mode In single sweep mode the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of mea surements sweeps is reached Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 This command has the same effect as the SENSe lt source gt SWEep COUNt com mand In both cases the number of measurements is defined whether the average cal culation is active or not The number of measurements applies to all traces in the window Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters lt NoMeasurements gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example SWE CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode AVER COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 AVER STAT ON Switches on the calculation of average INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps SENSe AVERage n TYPE lt FunctionType gt This command selects the type of average function Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters
178. erformed If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command pro duces a query error Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters The result is returned in the form lt result gt lt result gt where lt result gt PASSED FAILED and where the first returned value denotes the lower the second denotes the upper adjacent chan nel Example CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative This command defines the limit for the selected alternate adjacent channel in the selected measurement window for adjacent channel power measurements The refer ence value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power The numeric suffix after ALTernate lt 1 11 gt denotes the first or the second alternate channels It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALC LIM ACP ALT ABS This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent chan nel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt ch gt 1 11 alternate channel Parameters RST OdB The f
179. erne 208 FORMatDEXPort DSEParator aii cxdeaneuseesnescewseessnnesaiedacdscuatanseevadseadsenceawade sedeweadevwcadenivesoieeesterscane 222 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous INMMiate lt mF ESPeECuU E 224 ll ME BT 224 disp Eso 212 INPUtATTENUAION AUTO ere ce senen 212 INPULGOU PILING DEE INPut DIQ CDEVice INPUtDIO RANGE AUTO E 214 INPuEDIQ RANGe GCOUPlitig 222 ttt e vh esc eerta ee toc p esce eet torpet 214 INPut DIQ RANGSEUPPer iro HERE cr enr reist ic Be Died Ru a E beaded 215 leie bie Ce REITER 215 INPUtDIQISRA TC E 216 INPut DIQ SRATOUAUTO EE 216 INPut EATT INPUEATTAUT E 217 INRUtEA TESTATE niau EE S 217 INPUEEIETeE YIGI STATE in e E E E E EE 217 IS V Bap gc 218 legisset 218 liguria M 218 INS Tr mernt NSELGCL oic ront rtr rn tn nr e Een rt o e ERR EX D Ke E e HA Pa ex EXTR 169 INSTr ment SELeCl rr rrr rrt en err n rh eere TELTENE VE PE r ORE EDR EE CERTE A XR e ERE 169 ene E RE 225 MMEMory STOResHns TRAQGS tete tenet por ra eere eren tke hn e TR ERE CX d FOE ERE ke EE 225 OUTPut IF SOURce OUTPUT MIR GG ee M
180. es N is the number of data points lt Level gt the mask consists of Each data point is defined by the frequency in Hz and the level in dB or dBm All values are separated by commas Note that the data points have to be inside the current span Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Manual operation See Positioning data points on page 29 CALCulate lt n gt MASK MODE lt Mode gt This command defines the scaling of the level axis for frequency masks Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the level axis RELative relative scaling of the level axis RST RELative CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME lt Name gt This command creates or selects a frequency mask with the name that you specify by the parameter When you use it as a query the command returns the name of the mask currently in use Parameters lt Name gt String containing the name of the mask Note that an empty string does not select a frequency mask Manual operation See Labelling a frequency mask on page 27 See Load Mask on page 30 CALCulate lt n gt MASK SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the frequency span of the frequency mask Parameters lt Span gt Range 100 Hz to 40 MHz RST 40 MHz CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC MASK SPAN 10 MHz Defines a span of 10 MHz Manual operation See Defining the frequency mask span on page 27 CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer AUTO
181. es from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one Sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 193 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRIG key R amp S FSV K73 The TRIG key opens the following submenu The following softkey functions are available for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Trigger Source Free EU cce ennt ern ether ge Rae e HERD One paa aaa 69 ngger Source EXP rettet ern ph n e tnr e ea ge td d 70 Frequency Mask eee eet ende e ED TE He RR EE METER RE CAE nd 70 leet E 70 MAG GSR RE T T 70 Trigger Source Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 221 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Trigger Source External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit d
182. etector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves For details on detectors see chapter 6 4 3 Detector Overview on page 32 This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 189 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo on page 189 Video BW Auto Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected reso lution bandwidth Narrow video bandwidths result in longer sweep times due to the lon ger settling time Wide bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 189 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet RF Measurements Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time
183. ets the relative limit value in for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power Mode WCDMA CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe State This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent chan nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALC LIM ACP STAT ON The result can be queried with CALC LIM ACP ACH RES It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no valid results are available Suffix lt n gt n irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel during adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power in the selected measurement window It should be noted that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALC LIM ACP ACH REL This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent chan nel power as defined in mobile radio standards
184. ext smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum The cor responding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value Manual operation See Next Peak on page 74 See Next Peak Mode on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the
185. f the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 1 3 How to Use the Help System Calling context sensitive and general help gt To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on the front panel The help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available gt Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display help A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic e Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscre
186. f the recorded signal Thus it is not necessary to restart the measurement in order to switch the display mode The display modes and measurements specified by the 3GPP standard and available in Code Domain Analyzer mode are described in chapter 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer on page 55 The current configuration of the display i e which screens are displayed and which result diagram is displayed in which screen can be stored and retrieved later Thus you can easily switch between predefined display configurations Select Channel Opens a dialog box to select a channel and a slot Select Channel Slot Branch Common Settings Select Channel 0 256 Select Slot jo Select Branch P CH Q Select Channel Select Channel Selects a channel for the calculation of the result diagrams CDP PWR RELATIVE ABSOLUTE POWER VS SLOT SYMBOL CONST and SYMBOL EVM see also chapter 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams on page 24 There are two ways to enter the channel numbers Enter a channel number and spreading factor separated by a decimal point If the channel number and the spreading factor are entered simultaneously the entered channel is selected and marked in red if an active channel is involved For Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 the display the channel number entered is converted on the basis of spreading factor 512 For unused channels the code resulting from the conversion is
187. for HS DCH is used to carry control information CQI ACK NACK for downlink high speed data chan nels HS DCH It is used in HSDPA signal setup The data rate is fixed to 15ksps The code allocation depends on the number of active DPCH and is described in the table below This control channel is displayed in the upper part of the channel table The HS DPCCH can be switched on or off after the dura tion of 1 5 frame or 3 slots or 2ms Power control is applicable too EDPCCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to carry control information for uplink high speed data channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The data rate is fixed to 15ksps This control channel is displayed in the upper part of the channel table EDPDCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data for high speed channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The data rate and code allocation depends on the number of DPDCH and HS DPCCH refer to table below This data channel is displayed in the lower part of the channel table The following parameters of these channels are determined by the CDP measurement Channel Type Type of channel active channels only Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Channel Number Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Use TFCI Timing Offset Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the
188. for the current measurement automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 185 IQ Capture Settings Opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 x Common Settings Invert Q On e ott RRC Filter On off Data Capture Settings Frame To Analyze 0 Capture Length Trigger Settings Trigger Source C External CH Free Run Trigger Polarity Positive C Negative Trigger Offset 0 0 s Invert Q IQ Capture Settings Inverts the sign of the signal s Q component The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 177 RRC Filter IQ Capture Settings Selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT ON If an unfiltered WCDMA signal is received normal case the RRC fil ter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation Default set tings OFF If a filtered WCDMA signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal Remote command SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe on page 172 Analysis Mode IQ Capture Settings Select a result length of one slot or one complete frame Remote command SENSe CDPower BASE on page 171 Frame To Analyze IQ Capture Settings Enter the Frame to a
189. g starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 223 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 223 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time RF Measurements Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters
190. gt STATe on page 207 4 Select the required result diagram to be displayed in the selected screen Tip SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 113 5 Press Close To select a predefined display configuration You can retrieve previously stored display configurations and thus easily switch between different displays of measurement results 1 Select the Predefined tab in the Display Configuration dialog box The previously stored and default configurations are listed The current configura tion is displayed at the top of the dialog box 2 Select the required set of screen configurations 3 Press Apply To store the current display configuration You can store the current display configuration in the list of predefined settings in order to switch back to it later 1 Select the current display configuration at the top of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Add The current display configuration is added to the list of predefined settings Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 To remove a predefined display configuration You can remove one of the stored display configurations 1 Select the display configuration to be removed from the Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Remove The selected display configuration is removed from the list of predefined settings To restore the default display configurations You can restore the default set of pre
191. ha e Coches Ee x heic d rubet Chr ch ex ka ERR 172 SENSe CDPower o TR TEE 172 EI E e Ree e GER le EE SENSe GDPowWer ee EE SENSe CDPower ICThreshold SENSE CDPOWEr ele EE SENSe CDPower ECODe SEARch IMMediate 5 55 3 rouen rint ater kannte 174 SENSe GDPower EGODe SEARCh EIS T rr rice t ter iret aie OE eoe a naa HR ERE TEE EI E e ee Bea BC gl Ei E e ee BET TEE SENSe CDPower RTR TEE SENSe CDPower MAPPing a E E e ee e EE EI Ee ee e EE SENSe CBPower PDlsplay 1 rtt nitet ertet tre Rer rrr e ER Er e reed ne REI ISENS e ee ee ME E EI E e ee ee EE EI E e Eeer GETT SENSe FRE QuenCy CEN E E SENSe FREQUSncy CEN TOR STEP iiir rt co yere pr atur rra eer e REGIE ER ER EE PER Ea ane eae SENSe FREQU ency CENTer STEP AUN TO e ete ote eth re reat e tr RR HR aA SENSe FREQu n y CENTer STEP LINK ica ect t nose ansia cR E uen EEN SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor SENSe IFREQU erncy OFFSeLt 2 tret ect i genes c sebo e eati NEE EAR SENSe JFEREQGUSnoy S DEE SENSe FREQUSncy SPAN FU DE iuo ritenere esee Ro a dined einai neni SENSe FREQUency S TAR E SENSe FREQUENCY S ORs eege SENSE POW eg e EE TEE 178 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate channel eene 179 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel eene 178 SE
192. he connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Other Commands Referenced in this Manual lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Connected Device on page 78 See Digital IQ Info on page 79 INPut DIQ RANGe AUTO State If enabled the digital input fullscale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed Other Commands Referenced in th
193. he RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activate are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSVR offers 6 different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSVR saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t MODE on page 207 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSVR saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Pe
194. he center frequency can never exceed 20 MHz as the maximum realtime bandwidth is 40 MHz The second value defines the position of the data point on the vertical level axis By default level information is relative to the reference level You can however turn the level axis to absolute scaling with the Y Axis Abs Rel button This also changes the unit of the vertical axis dB for relative data points dBm for absolute data points Adding data points To add a new data point press the Insert button or the Insert Value Above softkey The R amp S FSVR always adds the data point to the left or in case of the table above of the currently selected data point The currently selected data point is highlighted gray in the table If no data point was selected previously the buttons add a new point next to the very first one m Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 28 6 3 3 Working with the Frequency Mask Trigger Deleting data points The Delete button or the Delete Value softkey remove a data point from the mask The R amp S FSVR deletes the currently selected data point If no data point is selected it deletes the first one The Delete button is inactive in that case Positioning data points There are two ways to move a single data point In the preview pane you can drag around t
195. he data points on the touchscreen or with a mouse and position it roughly in the place you want it to be A more exact method is to edit the data point table itself end enter the frequencies and levels as you need Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer DATA on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer DATA on page 158 Shifting mask points as a whole With the Shift X and Shift Y buttons you are able to move all mask points of a fre quency mask as one The Shift X button moves the mask point set horizontally while the Shift Y button moves them vertically This is an easy method to move mask points if the relative position of mask points to each other is alright already without adjusting each one by itself Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer SHIFt X on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer SHIFt Y on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer SHIFt X on page 157 CALCulate n MASK UPPer SHIFt Y on page 157 Automatic alignment of the frequency mask Instead of defining the position of every data point by hand the R amp S FSVR is able to shape the frequency mask according to the shape of the current signal On pressing the Auto Set Mask button the R amp S FSVR forms the frequency mask around the cur rent spectrum Note the the automatic alignment of the frequency mask works only for the upper fre quency mask Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer DATA on page 158 Managing Frequ
196. he lower adjacent chan nels uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent channels Example POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt lt Number gt This command selects the number of carrier signals The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 130 Parameters lt Number gt 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH TXCH COUN 3 SENSe POWer TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command assigns the channel adjacent channel power measurement to the indi cated trace The corresponding trace must be active i e its state must be different from blank Note The measurement of the occupied bandwidth OBW is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To evaluate another trace marker 1 must be posi tioned to another trace with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1to6 Example POW TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 WEEN SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet MCACpower This command adjusts the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the number of channels the channel bandwidths and the chan nel spacings selected in the active power measure
197. hiAu TO eterne tte aet nete tite et e c t e ec UE c 159 CALCUulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARQGILEI iri tierra Ere deeper eec dE 159 GAbGulatesn s PEAKsearch PSEarch PSFlOW conn nocet tton rhe pk rode rnit tex eee EET EXPE RR e FRE Ne EE Ea pa E 159 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges eese teen nnne nennen ennt 160 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate esee nnne 158 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe cs GALCulate lt n gt S TATistics NSAMMPIes rtt terr tr rtp ted nre e eene a pun GALCulate n STATistics PRESeL 1 rt rtr rennen rr eta rre ree e ER ro EE rH E Eras ee E EEN HELL CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALG AUTO ONGE cnn ttn rt nn nnne ern e nene ton GALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANG Enicsi area ri rr ere i eoa ra tn Rae rio CALCulat e lt n gt STATIsticS SCALE X REBVel secu itera put t ene eget nora epar ru RE eve ER pee PE Hs aa GALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALGHY ie E GALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y RE GAbCulatesn STATistics SGALe E el IT Culate lt n gt U NIT POW E CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog CONFigure WCDPowerMS CTABle CGOMMBrI euer n icono nee nhi ert eger Rae prn PE EE ea ATIAN a ERE ag GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COPY irr rtt tret rne dr pi rene ende n nns GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA eene ttr rre entro tcr er o Eee E EN CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPCCN
198. ia 89 IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 220 IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control 220 ell e e WE 68 78 96 106 Input AC DC remote control Input 50 Q 75 Q IQ Capture Settings Load mask m Marker 1 to 4 remote control sessss Marker E E Marker to Trace remote control Max Held EE Mech Alteri Auto eere edu Mech Atten Auto remote control 212 Mech Atten Manual anaseeanaaaeeeenaa 66 93 Mech Atten Manual remote control 212 Mit Eloldis ice cire dt et 5 99 1 New MaSK dem 27 Preamp OMOT 5 eret tes 45 66 93 Preamp On Off remote control 218 Ref Level Eet edd 44 65 90 Ref Level remote control ssussss 209 RES BW Auto entrer ene teta 97 Ies BW Manual 2 2 rt ter eren tret 97 RF Atten Auto s 67 94 RF Atten Auto remote control 212 RF Atten Manual unisus nens 66 93 RF Atten Manual remote control 212 Save remote control 225 Save EE 29 Select 1 2 3 4 remote control 128 Single Meas remote control sssssse 223 lte UE NEE 69 103 Single Sweep remote control 223 SWOOD nicis eati decere
199. ia a power attenuator of suitable attenuation The following values are recommended for the external attenuator to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the analyzer is not reduced too much Max power Recommended ext attenuation 355 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 350 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 345 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 340 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 335 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 330 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 325 to 30 dBm 5 to 10 dB 320 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer EXT REF IN OUT To ensure that the error limits specified by the 3GPP standard are met the ana lyzer should use an external reference frequency for frequency measurements on user equipment For instance a rubidium frequency standard may be used as a reference source e If the user equipment is provided with a trigger output connect this output to the rear trigger input of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE Presetting e Enter external attenuation REF LVL OFFSET e Enter reference level e Enter center frequency e Set the trigger e Select standard and measurement 5 3GPP FDD UE Test Models The possible channel configurations for the mobile station signal are limited by 3GPP Only two different configurations for data channels DPDCH are permis
200. ial Number 103634 Port Out A Digital Input Sample Rate 100 MHz Max Digital Input Transfer Rate 100 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Passed Digital IQ Output Connected Device ExBox Serial Number 100064 Port IQ IN Max Digital Output Transfer Rate 110 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Done Close For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 213 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSVR models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSVR to the R amp S EX Q BOX in addition to the R amp S Dig ital I Q Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see the R amp SGEx UO Box External Signal Interface Mod ule Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf s
201. ialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 221 Frequency Mask Activates the frequency mask trigger and opens the dialog box to set up a frequency mask for the frequency mask trigger For more information see chapter 6 3 Working with the Frequency Mask Trigger on page 26 Remote command see chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 221 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 193 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the swe
202. idat ed aipania iia 53 L Select e 53 E EE 54 SCIOCHBANC N E A A EE E AE A A E E reae ean Ere ET rn Rte Ud gae 54 Settings Overview The Settings Overview softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visual izes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes the current settings In addition the current settings can be changed via the Settings Overview dialog box To change the settings either use the rotary knob or the curser keys to change the focus to another button and press the ENTER key to open the corresponding dialog box To open the dialog boxes displayed in the Settings Overview dialog box you can also press the particular softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer submenu Settings Overview K73 x RRC Filter On Analysis Mode Frame Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frame to Analyze 0 Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Capture Length 1 Preamplifier Off Trigger Source Free Run Type Long Ref Level 22 87 dBm Trigger Polarity Positive Format Hex Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Trigger Offset 0 0s Scrambling Code 00 Descrambling Frontend IQ Capture Sync Search Despreading Channel Demodulation Display Detection Evaluation Configuration HS DPA UPA On Normalize Off Screen A Channel Table Search Mode Auto Code Power Relative Screen B Result Summary Using Table Select Compon I Screen C Composite Const Meas Interval Slot Screen D Channel Table Elim Tail Chips Off
203. ied in the data sheet 5 Pole filters do not support FFT mode 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are availa ble see the following table The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth For RRC filters the fixed roll off factor a is also indicated Table 6 2 Filter types Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFiLter 200 Hz CFiLter AO 300 Hz CFILter 500 Hz CFILter 1 kHz CFiLter 1 5 kHz CFiLter 2 kHz CFILter 2 4 kHz CFiLter SSB 2 7 kHz CFiLter 3 kHz CFiLter 3 4 kHz CFiLter 4 kHz CFILter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFiLter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFILter Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 6 kHz a 0 2 RRC APCO 8 5 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFiLter AM Radio 10 kHz CFiLter 12 5 kHz CFiLter CDMAone 14 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFiLter 16 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFiLter 21 kHz CFiLter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 kHz CFiLter 30 kHz CFiLter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFiLter 100 kHz CFiLter 150 kHz CFiLter FM Radio 192 kHz CFiLter PHS 200 kHz CFiLter 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFiLter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone
204. iew on the difference between active and inactive channels Pk CDE 30 ksps Avg RCDE 4 PAM The Pk CDE measurement specifies a projection of the difference between the test signal and the ideal reference signal onto the selected spreading factor in the selected slot The spreading factor onto which projection is made is shown beneath the measurement result Average Relative Code Domain Error over all channels detected with 4 PAM in the selected frame Table 7 2 Channel Results Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted No of Pilot Bits Indicates the number of pilot bits detected in the control channel Symbol EVM Peak or average of the results of the error vector magnitude measurement The measurement provides information on the EVM of the channel marked red in the CDP diagram in the slot marked red of the power versus slot diagram at the symbol level Chan Power Abs Channel power absolute Timing Offset Offset between the start of the first slot in the channel and the start of the ana lyzed 3GPP FDD UE frame Channel Slot No The channel slot number is obtained by combining the value of the selected CPICH and the channel s timing offset m d H 1 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 60 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Modul
205. ignal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP EVM see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 113 RS Mag Error vs Chip For the Meas Interval Slot see Demod Settings on page 51 the magnitude error is displayed for all chips of the selected slot For the Meas Interval Halfslot see Demod Settings on page 51 the magnitude error is displayed for the chips of one half slot The selected slot halfslot can be varied Possible entries are O to 14 for Slot and 0 to 29 for Halfslot The magnitude error is calculated as the difference between the magnitudes of the received and reference signal The reference signal is estimated out of the channel configurations of all active channels The magnitude error is given in percent referred to the square root of the mean power of the reference signal 100 NW 2560 ke 0 N 1 MAG magnitude error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP MAGN see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED sub system
206. imbalance of the signal in the selected slot in Composite EVM Rho Composite EVM The difference between the test signal and the ideal reference signal in the selected slot see Composite EVM RMS on page 56 Rho Quality paramter RHO for each slot No of Active Chan Indicates the number of active channels detected in the signal in the selected slot Both the detected data channels and the control channels are considered active channels Carrier Freq Error Displays the frequency error in the selected slot referred to the center fre quency of the analyzer The absolute frequency error is the sum of the analyzer and DUT frequency error Differences of more than 1 kHz between transmitter and receiver frequency impair the synchronization of the CDP measurement For this reason the trans mitter and receiver should be synchronized see chapter Getting Started Trigger to Frame This result displays the timing offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the analyzed 3GPP FDD UE frame In the case of trig gered data collection this timing offset is identical with the timing offset of frame trigger trigger offset frame start In the case of failure of the synchroniza tion of the analyzer and 3GPP FDD UE signal the value of Trigger to Frame is not significant Avg Power Intact Chan The power in the code domain of all inactive channels is averaged to give the user an overv
207. ink high speed data channels HS DCH It is used in HSDPA signal setup The data rate is fixed to 15ksps The code allocation depends on the number of active DPCH and is described in the table below This control channel is displayed in the upper part of the channel table The HS DPCCH can be switched on or of at for a duration of 1 5 frame 3 slots 2ms Power control is applicable too EDPCCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to carry control informa tion for uplink high speed data channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The data rate is fixed to 15ksps This control channel is displayed in the upper part of the channel table EDPDCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data for high speed channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The data rate and code allocation depends on the number of DPDCH and HS DPCCH refer to table below This data channel is displayed in the lower part of the channel table The following parameters of these channels are determined by the CDP measurement Chan Type Type of channel active channels only Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor Sym Rate ksps Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted 15 ksps to 960 ksps Stat Status display Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive chan nels TFCI Indication whether the data channel uses TFCI symbo
208. ints of the 1536 Chips for the specified slot are displayed This data is determined inside the DSP even before the channel search l e it is not possible to assign constellation points to channels The constellation points are displayed normalized with respect to the total power Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP COMP CONS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED sub system on page 113 Power vs Slot The Power vs Slot display mode indicates the power of the selected code channel depending on the slot number The power of the selected channel marked red in the CDP diagram is displayed versus all slots of a frame of the 3GPP FDD UE signal The softkey is only valid if one frame of the 3GPP signal is analyzed Beginning at the start of the 3GPP FDD UE frame 15 or 30 successive slots are dis played depending on the value of the SLOT RES softkey The power is shown in absolute scaling R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements It is not only possible to select a code channel in the CDP diagram but also to mark a slot in the power versus slot diagram Marking is done by entering the slot number The selected slot is marked in red For more detailed displays the marked slot of the channel is used see SLOT entry in the information area above the diagram Modifying a slot number has the following effects e The CDP diagram in the upper half of the display is updated referred to the entered slot number
209. ion of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Manual operation See Clear Write on page 33 See Max Hold on page 33 See Min Hold on page 33 See Average on page 34 See View on page 34 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Manual operation See Blank on page 34 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe lt Range gt This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling The command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Range gt Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Manual operation See Range Log 100 dB on page 91 See Range Log 50 dB on page 91 See
210. irst value is the limit for the lower and the upper alternate adjacent channel The second limit value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSE family Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative STATe State This command activates the limit check for the selected alternate adjacent channel in the selected measurement window for adjacent channel power measurements Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALC LIM ACP STAT ON The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes alternate channel The result can be queried with CALC LIM ACP ALT lt 1 11 gt RES It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no valid results are obtained Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt ch gt 1 11 alternate channel Parameters State RST OFF CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the first alternate adjacent channels Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt 1 11 gt ABSolute This command defines the absolute limit value for the selected alternate adjacent channel
211. is Manual For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 79 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 79 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters Level numeric value Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Example INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 79 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Level Unit on page 79 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters Level V dBm dBpW W
212. is command switches the channel table on or off When switch on takes place the measured channel table is stored under the name RECENT and is switched on After the RECENT channel table is switched on another channel table can be selected with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 166 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Channel Search Mode on page 49 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME lt FileName gt This command selects an existing channel table or creates the name of a new channel table Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file Before using this command the RECENT channel table must be switched on first with the command CONF WCDP CTAB STAT ON Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB1 ON CONF WCDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Channel Search Mode on page 49 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA lt TableValues gt This command defines the values of the selected channel table Each line of the table consists of 6 values CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt TableValues gt Code Class Number of active chann
213. is coupling ratio is the default setting of the R amp S FSVR RF Measurements This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 001 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 189 Span RBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000 Remote command BAND RAT 0 1 See SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio on page 188 Default Coupling Coupling Ratio Sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 1 and the ratio SPAN RBW to 100 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 187 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 189 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 194 Filter Type Opens a submenu to select the filter type This softkey and its submenu are available for measuring the the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF Instead of opening a submenu this softkey opens the Sweep List dialog box to select the filter type when measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The submenu contains the following softkeys e Normal 3 dB e CISPR 6 dB MIL Std 6 dB Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available o
214. isplay of code domain power as bar graph relative scal ing XTIM CDP SYMB CONStellation Result display of symbol constellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM Result display of symbol error vector magnitude XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM MAGNitude Result display of the symbol magnitude error XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM PHASe Result display of the symbol phase error RST depends on the active screen Example CALC3 FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM Activates the result summary in screen C Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower Subsystem The CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower subsystem defines limit checking for adjacent chan nel power measurements CAL Culate nzLIMI ACbowert STAT E nennen nennen nnns 116 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower AC Hannelt REI atvel eene 116 CAL Culate nz IM ACbower ACHannelt REI atvel STATe nenen ene eeeerererene 117 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute cccccsscecescececeseeesseseeceeeeeeeseeeaes 117 CALCulate n LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe eese 118 CAL Culate nzLUMIT ACbowerACHannelRtGut 118 CAL Culate nz IM ACbower Al Temate chztREIL ativel eneee ererererererersrersenen 119 CAL Culate nz IM ACbower Al Temate chztREIL ativelSr aTe 119 CAL Culate nzLUMIt ACbower Al Temate i JizAbBGolute 120 CAL Culate nzLUlMIt ACbowerAlTemate i JisAbBGolutez aTe 120 CAL Culate nzLUMI ACbowerAlTemate i J1sRESu 121 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73
215. k softkey resets the current shape of the mask to its default state Labelling a frequency mask Assign a name to the frequency mask in the Name field Activate the input in the Name field either by touching it or via the Edit Name softkey This is also the save name of the frequency mask In addition to naming the mask you can also comment on the frequency mask you are working on in the Comment field Again activate the input either by touching it or with the Edit Comment softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MASK COMMent on page 154 CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 Defining the frequency mask span Define the span of the frequency mask The span defines the range that the frequency mask covers on the frequency axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MASK SPAN on page 156 Working with upper and lower lines A frequency mask may have an upper and a lower threshold with the signal in between The checkboxes next to the Upper Line and Lower Line buttons activate or deactivate the corresponding line Note that it is not possible to deactivate both lines R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements pme M p Se ee You can select the line you want to edit with the Upper Line Lower Line buttons or by touching the corresponding area in the preview to apply any changes The buttons turn blue if a line is selected and the R amp S FSVR shows the data points in
216. k detector 92 Average detector sissesiiuni ises i2 average power of inactive channels 60 Average trace mode sssssssseeeeee 34 72 B Bandwidth ITI Resolution Vid6O ues Blank trace mode C Capture Length Jac rr rrr ce rera carne 47 Carrier Freq Error dei CODF d S 84 Complementary cumulative distribution function 84 CDP channel parameter 5 ntt 61 Center frequency 2 SIE SIZE AEE E T N CF Stepsize Ge EE E EE Chan POW EEN Chan Power Rel Chan Ke channel Cleri CAT 228 channel assignment table channel detection settings 2 rennes 48 Channel tables Copying Deleting m Edititig iere ten nere Characters SPSClal M 110 Chip rate re EEN 60 Clear Write trace mode senssnnnseessnnninnseennnnneeeeeee na 33 71 Code Power Displ Mp M 52 Commands DOSCHIBUON SPP 109 Composite EVM iier et tec E cerea out 60 228 Continuous E 68 103 Correction inlierent e 95 coupling default settings i rre 102 Coupling Resolution bandwidth isinne 97 Sweep time a Video bandwidth pissis iseun asasi 98 D demodulation le EE 51 descrambling C UMP a aS 48 detector e 32 DiglConf e EEE 81 Digital IQ data CLC e 78 Digital IQ Info Remote control
217. ksps 32 Q 4 3840 ksps 15 ksps 1 l 5 4800 ksps 15 ksps 32 Q 6 5760 ksps 15 ksps 1 l Table 5 4 Channelization code of HS DPCCH Nmax dpdch as defined in subclause 4 2 1 Channelization code C 1 Cn 256 64 2 4 6 Cn 256 1 3 5 Ceon 256 32 6 6 1 6 2 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equip ment Measurements The R amp S FSVR equipped with the 3GPP User equipment measurement option R amp S FSV K73 performs code domain power measurements on downlink signals according to the 3GPP standard Third Generation Partnership Project FDD mode Signals that meet the conditions for channel configuration of 3GPP standard test mod els 1 to 5 can be measured including HSDPA and HSUPA signals test model 5 In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the 3GPP standard the 3GPP user equipment measurements option offers measurements with predefined set tings in the frequency domain e g power measurements To open the 3GPP UE menu e fthe 3GPP FDD UE mode is not the active measurement mode press the MODE key and select the 3GPP FDD UE softkey e fthe 3GPP FDD UE mode is already active press the MENU key The 3GPP UE menu is displayed Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This chapter describes the menus and softkeys for CDA measurements The Span Bandwidth and Marker Function menus are disabled for measurements in the
218. l Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep ing e Sweep on page 99 e FFT on page 100 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 34 e Auto on page 100 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 194 RF Measurements FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 194 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 194 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the fil
219. l trace memory TR ACesnsf DATA 196 e E 197 TRACeensDATAI EE 198 TRACenbP DATA cdeciiccinissacsacsessateinns sedans aet oca ces reda Ed c ttt Rd Eiana 198 Roe nA CELO ETE 199 TR ACeensDATAI ttt ttt tette tt ttt ttt stets ttes te tate tet det std 201 TRADES DATAIT aces aperta nr cim cta ee 202 TRACE DATA Dern e a a ege 203 TRACe lt n gt DATA lt DataType gt This query reads trace data out of the instrument The result depends on the specified data type see also chapter 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer on page 55 For details on the results see the individual command descriptions TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt DataType gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 ABITstream CWCDp CTABLe TPVSlot CEVM LIST Example TRAC DATA CEVM Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA ABITstream lt n gt This command returns the bit streams of all 15 slots one after the other The output format may be REAL UINT or ASCII The number of bits of a 16QAM modulated chan nel is twice that of a QPSK modulated channel the number of bits of a G4QAM modu lated channel is three times that of a QPSK modulated channel This query is only available if the result diagram for the corresponding screen is set to Bitstream e g using the CALC FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam command see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 113
220. lear Write Trace mode Values 592 Number of results values List of results 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 7 1 4 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measure ments The R amp S FSV K73 option appears in the Select Mode menu MODE key as 3GPP FDD UE This softkey can be used to start the R amp S FSV K73 options The most important parameters for the 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests are sum marized in the root menu of the R amp S FSV K73 option and explained below using the softkey functions The root menu is available by pressing the 3GPP FDD UE softkey in the Select Mode menu the MEAS key or the HOME key The Code Domain Analyzer softkey activates the code domain analyzer measurement mode and opens the submenus for setting the measurement The Power Ch Power ACLR Spectrum Emission Mask Occupied Bandwidth CCDF and RF Combi softkeys activate tests in the analyzer mode Pressing the associated softkey performs the settings required by 3GPP specifications A subse quent modification of settings is possible It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a soft key is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this informa tion is delivered in the corresponding softkey description chapter 7 1 Code Domain Analyzer Mea surements K73 on page 39 Activates the code domain measurement mode and opens another submenu for s
221. ls PilotL Bits Number of pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH Pwr Abs dBm Pwr Rel dBm T Offs Chips Indication of the absolute and relative channel power referred to the CPICH or the total power of the signal Timing offset Offset between the start of the first slot of the channel and the start of the analyzed 3GPP FDD UE frame In CODE CHAN AUTO SEARCH mode a data channel is designated as active if its power has a minimum value compared to the total power of the signal and if a mini mum signal noise ratio is maintained within the channel In CODE CHAN PREDEFINED mode each data channel that is included in the user defined channel table is considered to be active In the R amp S FSV K73 the display configuration can be set to show quarter screens In such a case the channel table is reduced to Channel Code SF State and Power Abs Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR CTAB see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 113 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 62 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Power vs Symbol The Power vs Symbol measurement shows the power over the symbol number for the selected channel and the selected slot The power is not averaged here The trace is drawn using a histogram line algorithm i e only vertical and horizontal lines no diagonal linear Interpolation polygon interpolation Surfa
222. main power analysis The value can only be read once The possible events are described in the table below Example STAT QUES SYNC EVEN Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CDMA EVDO TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Bit Definition Not used Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible reasons e Incorrectly set frequency Incorrectly set level Incorrectly set scrambling code Incorrectly set values for Q INVERT or SIDE BAND INVERT Invalid signal at input Not used 3to4 Not used Incorrect Pilot Symbol This bit is set when one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pilot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible reasons Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the WCDMA signal Oneor more code channels has a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR Oneor more channels are sent with high power ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorrectly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display 6 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 8 7 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instruments interna
223. marked Example Enter 5 128 Channel 5 is marked at spreading factor 128 30 ksps if the channel is active oth erwise code 20 at spreading factor 512 Enter a channel number without a decimal point In this case the instrument interprets the entered code as based on spreading fac tor 512 If the code entered corresponds to a used channel the entire associated channel is marked If the code corresponds to an unused channel only the code entered is marked Example Enter 20 Code 20 is marked at spreading factor 512 if there is no active channel on this code If for instance channel 5 is active at spreading factor 128 the entire channel 5 is marked If the entered code corresponds to an active channel the entire associated chan nel is marked If it corresponds to a gap between the channels only the entered code is marked If the code number is modified using the rotary knob the red marking changes its position in the diagram only if the code number no longer belongs to the marked channel The step width of the changed rotary knob position refers to a spreading factor of 512 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 171 Select Slot Select Channel Selects the slot for evaluation This affects the following result diagrams see also chapter 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams on page 24 Code Domain Power Peak Code Domain Error Result Summary Composite Constellation Code Domain Error Power Channel Table Power vs
224. ment If necessary adjacent chan nel power measurement is switched on prior to the adjustment To obtain valid results a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed after the adjustment Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Example POW ACH PRES MCAC Mode WCDMA SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent chan nel ADJ The modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC 33kHz Sets the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel to 33 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz and so on SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt channel gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel ALT1 ALT2 A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing cau ses a change by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt Spacing
225. n of the SWEEP key in the base unit for information on the other softkeys available for RF measurements In Code Domain Analyzer mode the following functions are available in the submenu COnUNWOUS SWEEP E 68 lte EE 69 Continue Single SWeOD 2 eR benedict nail 69 i e EE 69 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count Softkey Sweep Count on page 69 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 223 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 223 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 223 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Valu
226. nalyze and to be displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower FRAMe LVALue on page 172 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Capture Length IQ Capture Settings Enter the capture length amount of frames to record Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 173 Trigger Source External IQ Capture Settings Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGgercn SEQuence SOURce on page 221 Trigger Source Free Run IQ Capture Settings The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 221 Trg Gate Polarity IQ Capture Settings Sets the polarity of the trigger gate source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all trigger modes with the exception of the Free Run Power Sensor and Time mode For details also see Using Gated Sweep Operation in the base unit description Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length dur
227. ncy mask LEAVing Triggers on leaving the frequency mask INSide The trigger is active as long as the signal is inside the frequency mask OUTSide The trigger is active as long as the signal is outside the fre quency mask RST INSide Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Manual operation See Setting the trigger condition on page 28 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe Type This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Type POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Trg Gate Polarity on page 47 See Trigger Polarity on page 70 TRIGger n SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source softkey in the base unit description Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Source gt EXTernal IFPower IMMediate MASK TIME VIDeo Note that the availability of the trigger source depends on the measurement you are in EXTernal Selects an external trigger IFPower Selects the power trigger on the second intermediate frequency IMMediate Selects the free run mode no trigger MASK Selects the frequency mask trigger TDTRigger Selects the time domain trigger TIME Selects the time trigger
228. ne MASK COMM EE 154 GALOCulate n MASK DELete i iecc iiec KEREN aa SEENEN RA eA na P AR VR RIA RR M A EEEa 154 CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer SHIFt X cccccceseccecesceeseesceeeseeeceeeceseeeeeseeceeeecesseeseeeanees 155 CAL Culate lt ne MASK EOWeRSHIPRRY EE 155 GALCulatesn x MASK EOWer STATe actutum re teen arae naue eh on anxie 155 CAL Culate nzMAGkKLOWert DATA 155 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CAL Culatesni MASKIMODE EE 156 e er DE EE 156 CAL CulatesmMASRISBAN EE 156 CAL CulatesmMASKUPPeBIEAUTO EE 157 CAL Gulate lt n MASK UPPer EE 157 CALOulate n MASK UPPer SHIFtY 1 eieecc edis ies an esa densa na Ra mna aaa d endana a S ARR OD ads 157 CAL Culate nzMAGk Uber STATel aa eee eae ceseceteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeananaea 157 CAL GCulate n MASK UPPer DATA 2222 protette hee ca Lato Eaa E ea Y 158 CALCulate lt n gt MASK CDIRectory lt Subdirectory gt This command selects the directory the R amp S FSVR stores frequency masks in Parameters lt Subdirectory gt String containing the path to the directory The directory has to be a subdirectory of the default directory Thus the path is always relative to the default directory C R_S INSTR FREQ MASK An empty string selects the default directory Example See chapter 8 2 6 4 CALCulate MASK Subsystem on page 152 Manual operation See Load Mask on page 30 CALCulate lt n gt MASK COMMent Comment This
229. nly available if the optional software is installed To return to the R amp S FSVR application press any key on the front panel The applica tion is displayed with the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSVR once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSVR to the R amp S DiglConf automati cally which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock
230. nly with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel e RRC e 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 34 and chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 35 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 188 RF Measurements 7 2 6 5 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Sweep menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Contituous SWEEP EE 103 rmn TE 103 Continue Single SWEGP EE 103 Sweeptime Manual 103 Sweeptime AUTO ciranean iiaa aaia a idadaan aa E 104 SWegBD EE 104 EE 105 Mixte t 105 o M 105 DEE Fiter POO c a 105 L 105 EE 105 e BET Me ER 105 SWEG PONS EE 106 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Count on page 69 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 223 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggerin
231. nual eene 206 881 DISPlay SubSyStOelm ioci cata eot oa c vr t EAR 207 9 8 2 INPut SubSyStOetri z rct t te e i e decida i b ck a e 211 883 DRlGgerSUubSyStOrmi attenta teca v rua aad veta vua Eua dex bd Y 219 8 8 4 Other Referenced Commands oratore entr Yd tt vata Vedi Y E Ped n 222 8 1 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10
232. nual on page 88 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples the step size of the center frequency to the span ON or sets the value of the center frequency entered via SENSe FREQuency CENTer OFF Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt Example Manual operation SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size manual input RST SPAN FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN See 0 1 Span span gt 0 on page 86 See 0 1 RBW span gt 0 on page 87 See 0 5 Span span gt 0 on page 87 See 0 5 RBW span gt 0 on page 87 See x Span span gt 0 on page 87 See x RBW span gt 0 on page 87 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt Example Manual operation Range 1 to 100 RST 10
233. o 384 max For QPSK modulation a symbol consists of 2 Bits I and Q For BPSK modulation a symbol consists of 1 Bit only used Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP BSTR see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 113 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Freq Err vs Slot To reduce the overall span of Frequency Err vs Slot the difference between the fre quency error of the corresponding slot to the frequency error of the first zero slot is calculated for each value to be displayed This helps eliminate a static frequency offset of the whole signal to achieve a better display of a real time depending frequency curve Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP FVSL see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 113 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot The Phase Discontinuity vs Slot is calculated according to 3GPP specifications The phase calculated for each slot is interpolated to both ends of the slot using the fre quency shift of that slot The difference between the phase interpolated for the begin ning of one slot and the end of the preceding slot is displayed as the phase discontinu ity of that slot Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP PSVS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 113 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu FREQ key R amp S FSV K73 The FREQ key opens a submenu to change the measurement frequency Some softkey functions are not availabl
234. of the analyzer In accord ance with the SCPI standard the keyword SENSe is optional which means that it is not necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences Note that most commands in the SENSe subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here SENSe CDPower Gubevstem eene 170 SENSe POWer Subsystem sse nennen nen 178 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 184 SENSe CDPower Subsystem This subsystem controls the parameters for the code domain mode The numeric suffix in SENSe is not significant in this subsystem ISENSe JODPOWEEBRASE E 171 Eier ele e RTE 171 Ee RI el NEE e 171 SENSE CDPower PIL Te STATS EE 172 ISGENGeICDbPowerERAMel VAL ue 172 ISENSeTCODPoWwer TE E ETC 172 SENSe CDPowerHSDPamode 2 2 roi ascen a i aa ae Ee kd aaa ETa 172 SENSe CDPower HS Ot m 173 SENSGICDPawermlC Threshold cct a dee eg EES 173 SENSe COPowerlQLength in aa vnu 2 aD EIET et NENS 173 ISENSe JCDPower LOODS TYPE erre rte RR ou a a a ER eaa eR EATE EE 174 SENSe CDPower L CODe GEARchTMMedtatel nennen 174 SENSeICDPOWerECODeSEAReGhIbIS T orta ise ott Rea deett eee ettet 174 SENSe ICDPowerTEOCODe VALUe 2 2 2 coii rero eter cetero eeu abaci nc sena ud 175 SENSe GDPowerEEVel ADUusl tree rrr e diranian nn banc pao Se nen da 175 Ei Le RIED 176 SENSe ICDPowetrNORMAaliz amp 2 uoc oiii re
235. oftkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for RF measurements For CDA measurements see chapter 7 1 12 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements on page 77 yit AC By Oy TP 106 NOISE ZEHREN ed 106 Video LE 106 Power SONS Ol denge EES ERER ER A 107 WU ofc RI M EET 107 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSVR between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 213 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSVR Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 223 Video Output Turns output on the IF Video output available with option R amp S FSV B5 on and off RF Measurements When you turn on the output you can select to output either the intermediate fre quency or the video signal Note Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode Remote command OUTP IF VID see OUTPut IF SOURce on page 225 Power Sensor For precise power measurement a power sensor can be connected to the instrument via the front panel USB connector or the rear panel power sensor option R amp S FSV B5 The Power Sensor Support firm
236. oftware see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Man ual TX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSVR for digital out put to a connected device Transmitter Type m M u Gc d Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 80 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP EDD UE Measurements RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSVR for digital input from a connected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOX is delivered with the R amp S FSVR firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instru ment If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is o
237. ol ACLR Ref Setting remote control 180 Adjacent Channel POoWet enne 83 Adjust Ref Level remote control 180 Adjust Settings remote control 162 All Marker Off undo Ampere ee wi 92 APD remote control 161 ASCII File Export remote control 225 Auto remote cofitrol seau 2 trenes 194 Auto All P Average Mode remote control sss 186 C N remote control AA 129 130 C No remote control 129 130 ob i 84 CCDF remote control CF Stepsize remote Control 190 Channel Bandwidth remote control 178 179 Channel Detection Settings 0 0 0 0 eee 48 Channel Spacing remote control 182 183 Cont Meas remote control ssssssss 224 Continue Single Sweep remote control 223 224 Continuous Sweep remote control 224 Coupling Ratio EE 100 CP ACP MC ACLR remote control 129 130 CPIGH WEE 75 0 E 92 dBmv 92 dBpW 92 dBypA 92 OBUV ines 22 92 Default Couplitig 2 err ttes 102 Default Settings remote control 161 163 Demodulation Settings tne 51 Descrambling Sync Search Settings
238. ollowing text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks 1 2 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board How to Use the Help System 1 2 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions o
239. omponent Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Invert Q on page 46 SENSe CDPower SFACtor lt SpreadingFactor gt This command defines the spreading factor The spreading factor is only significant for display mode PEAK CODE DOMAIN ERROR Parameters SpreadingFactor 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 RST 256 Example CDP SFAC 256 Mode WCDMA SENSe CDPower SLOT lt numeric value gt This command selects the slot Power Control Group PCG to be analyzed Parameters lt numeric value gt Range 0 to TDS 62 CDMA capture length 1 WCDMA 14 Increment 1 RST 0 The capture length is defined via the SENSe CDPower IOLength command Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 for analysis Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Select Slot on page 54 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 8 5 2 SENSe POWer Subsystem This subsystem controls the parameters for the spectral power measurements The numeric suffix in SENSe lt 1 4 gt is not significant in this subsystem ISENSe TPOWer ACHannel ACP als csc itera nett exe tent head o che dace te edd nha 178 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel sus 178 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel esses eene 179 ISGENGe JPOWer AC Hanne BANDwidlDWIDO Al Termate channelz reenen 179 SENSe IPOWer ACHanhneEMODJE 2 tet iecccsgeiieceneesiacstp as anO TN REER 17
240. on page 113 T Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Phase Error vs Chip For the Meas Interval Slot see Demod Settings on page 51 the phase error is dis played for all chips of the selected slot For the Meas Interval Halfslot see Demod Settings on page 51 the phase error is displayed for the chips of one half slot The selected slot halfslot can be varied Possible entries are O to 14 for Slot and 0 to 29 for Halfslot The phase error is calculated as the difference between the phases of the received and reference signal The reference signal is estimated out of the channel configura tions of all active channels The magnitude error is given in grad ranging from 180 to 180 PHI ds ax N 2560 ke 0 7 1 where PHI phase error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot OCH phase calculation of a complex value Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP PHAS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED sub system on page 113 Composite Constellation The Composite Const measurement analyzes the entire signal for one single slot For large numbers of channels to analyze the results will superimpose In that case the benefit of this measurement is limited senseless In Composite Const measurement the constellation po
241. ore adapted measurement parameters the following level parameters are saved on exiting and are set again on re entering this measurement Level Parameters e RBW VBW e Sweep time e SPAN e NO OF ADJ CHANNELS e FAST ACP MODUS For further details about the ACP measurements refer to Settings of CP ACLR Test Parameters of the base unit CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 164 Query of results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 129 RF Measurements 7 2 4 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth softkey activates the measurement of the bandwidth that the signal occupies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 96 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth and the frequency markers are output in the marker info field at the top right edge of the screen as OBW The following user specific settings are not modified on the first access following pre setting e Reference Level Reference Level Offset Center Frequency Frequency Offset Input Attenuation Mixer Level e All trigger settings Pressing the Occupied Bandwidth softkey activates the analyzer mode with defined settings OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH TRACE1 DETECTOR SAMPLE To restore adapted measurement parameters the following level parameters ar
242. ox for manual value definition select the Man mode again RF Measurements If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 217 INPut EATT on page 216 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 210 Ref Level Position Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis The setting range is from 200 to 200 0 corresponding to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 210 Grid Abs Rel Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis not available with Linear range Only available for RF measurements Abs Absolute scaling The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level Absolute scaling is the default setting Rel Relative scaling The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB The scaling
243. pens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis man ually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 208 Range Linear Range Selects linear scaling for the level axis in The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default set ting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Range Lin Unit Range Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 211 Unit Opens the Unit submenu to select the unit for the level axis The default setting is dBm If a transducer is switched on the softkey is not available RF Measurements In general the signal analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input The level display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated
244. power of signal branch Q Screen B Peak code domain error projection of error onto the class with spread ing factor 256 4 Setup for User Equipment Tests Risk of instrument damage Before switching on the instrument make sure that the following conditions are met Instrument covers are in place and all fasteners are tightened e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm e The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation The instrument is operated in the horizontal position on an even surface The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet e Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Failure to meet these conditions may cause damage to the instrument or other devices in the test setup This section describes how to set up the analyzer for 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests As a prerequisite for starting the test the instrument must be correctly set up and connected to the AC power supply as described in chapter 1 of the operating manual for the analyzer Furthermore application firmware module R amp S FSV K73 must be properly installed following the instructions provided in the operating manual for the analyzer Standard Test Setup e Connect antenna output or TX output of UE to RF input of the analyzer v
245. r fmax SPAN pin 2 Span 0 0 Hz lt foenter s fmax fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 190 CF Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of 1096 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be set to a fraction of the span span gt 0 or a fraction of the resolu tion bandwidth span 0 or it can be set to a fixed value manually Apart from the Center Marker and Manual softkeys the other softkeys are dis played depending on the selected frequency span This softkey is available for RF measurements 0 1 Span span 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 96 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 190 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 191 RF Measurements 0 1 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the resolution bandwidth This is the default setting Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 190 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe F
246. r Polantty EE S ee Unit remote control Use Zoom Limits remote control Video BW Auto remote control Video BW Manual remote control Se Kl Ke TEE x Axis Range remote control x Axis Ref Level remote control x Demod BW K7 Y PERJDIV ac dite tite to eas eter y Axis Max Value remote control y Unit Abs remote control Zero Span remote control sss Softkey AUT e cce eee tei bte Auto Level hire BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 219 Blan qm 34 In 44 64 86 Center remote control AAA 190 UE KEE 86 Clear Write 33 71 Cont Meas remote control sssssss 223 Continue Single Sweep 69 103 Continuous Sweep sese 68 103 Continuous Sweep remote control 223 Decim Sep remote control AAA 222 Delete MaSK me DiglConf dergisine EL Atten remote control EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control 216 217 El Atten On Off 22 ete 67 94 EX HQSBOX sacraire einen rete edet eed 80 EET etit E ete tits 100 105 FFT Filter Mode 100 105 Frequency mask ttr iA 26 Frequency Offset remote control e 191 Frontend Settings nr teneret 44 Full Spa enitn erre enr ii
247. r class CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt lt NoPowerClasses gt This command sets the number of power classes to be defined Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt irrelevant Parameters lt NoPowerClasses gt 1 to 4 RST 1 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe lt State gt This command defines which limits are evaluated in the measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt State gt ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed RST REL Example CALC LIM ESP PCL LIM ABS CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum lt Level gt This command sets the upper limit level for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always ends at 200 dBm i e the upper limit of the last power class can not be set If more than one power class i
248. r input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 217 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the elec tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic
249. r magnitude EVMgys The measurement interval of the RMS value depends on analyzer settings and the channel configuration of the applied signal refer to SENSe CDPower ETCHips on page 171 The information of the chip limits of the used measurement interval are given for each slot Suffix n 1 4 window Return values Result 15 groups with 6 values per group are returned lt slot0 gt lt EVMO0 gt lt BeginMeas0 gt lt End MeasO Reserved A0 Reserved B0 lt slot1 gt lt EVM1 gt lt BeginMeas1 gt EndMeas1 lt Reserved_A1 gt lt Reserved_B1 gt lt slot14 gt lt EVM14 gt lt BeginMeas14 gt lt End Meas14 gt lt Reserved_A14 gt lt Reserved_B14 gt Example TRAC2 DATA CEVM Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABLe This command returns the channel state active inactive in addition to the values returned for TRACE lt n gt Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Return values lt Result gt lt class gt lt channel number gt lt absolute level gt lt relative level gt lt I Q component gt pilot length channel state Commac separated list with 7 values for each channel the pilot length is always O For details on the other result information see TRACe n DATA on page 203 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example TRAC DATA CTABLe Returns a list of channel information including the pilot length and channel state Usage Query only Mode WCDMA
250. rPosition gt This command queries the measured value of a marker If necessary the command activates the marker or turns a delta marker into a normal marker To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt MarkerPosition gt Defines the vertical marker position in the persistence spectrum result display Return values lt Result gt The measured value of the selected marker is returned Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 In UO Analyzer mode for Real Imag I Q for example 1 852719887E 011 0 Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 73 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 74 See CPICH on page 75 See PCCPCH on page 75 8 2 5 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion subsystem The CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzEUNGCHonCPIch eene nennen nns nn nnns 129 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonPCCbch 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESUIt cccccescccceescesseeseceeeeeeeeneeeaes 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
251. range of the reference level is modified by the offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Other Commands Referenced in this Manual lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 10dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 44 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Value This command defines a reference level offset Suffix n irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters Value Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Ref Level Offset on page 45 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border Range O to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT Default unit PCT Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Manual operation See Ref Value Position on page 66 See Ref Level Position on page 95 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid 8 8 2 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant
252. re e Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame e Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the WCDMA signal Oneor more code channels have a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR Oneor more channels are sent with high power ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorrectly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display 10 Glossary Composite EVM In accordance with the 3GPP specifications the squared error between the real and imaginary parts of the test signal and an ideal reference signal is determined EVM referred to the total signal in a composite EVM measurement DPCCH DPDCH Dedicated physical control channel control channel The DPCCH contains pilot TFCI TPC and FBI bits The control channel is assumed to be present in every signal in R amp S FS K73 Dedicated physical data channel data channel The data chan nels only contain data bits Data channels for user equipment signals are assigned a certain scheme defined in 3GPP specifi cations Inactive Channel Threshold Minimum power that a single channel must have as compared to the total signal to be recognized as an active channel Peak Code Domain Error In accordance with the 3GPP specifications the error between the test signal and the ideal
253. reference signal is projected onto the classes of the different spreading factors in the case of a peak code domain measurement List of Commands SENSE JADJUSTAL es eise Ed da eel ah dereita Sae rsads a ar 184 SENSe ADJust CONFig ration HYS Teresis L OWer 5 antreten bee na cau tna eere totae ern eren Poche Xara 184 IGENZGe IAD Just COhNFouraton HG Teresie Ufer 184 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation ertt rt err te eter te ENEE 185 SENS ADJUSt LEVE e E SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt EN SENS AVERa ge s gt TYPE essenin iena a ENEE SENS BAND width Wl MI DEO zirnis o a lari dE 189 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VID6O ATQ cce tae terreri creer c rette EAEE EA 189 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VID6O RATIO 1 nitet a Pet te gabe rte ege cct ecu Pre Ro dg 189 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESOlution stees o i a nnd tesi Resp 186 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AU TO iaa A nnne nnne nennen 187 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT rnnt ene ttt etn tn ehe taba te pc 187 IEN Ge IDGANDwidblDWIDODTRE Solution HRATIo oazis giae ioii 188 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDthERESolution T YBE 2 2 cere tr trei tre e re erras 188 SENS6 CDPOWer BASE ient it e Ue cepa be eee PER EE tet de e ER t ee o erie 171 S EQT M eiPluesg Helelact M Mm 171 SENSe CDPoWer T CHIPS E 171 SENSe GDPower FIETer S KN HEET 172 SENSe GDPower ERAMeSELVALue zs au neci ec
254. rennt ntn tn adsense kde a enu 64 Code Domain Power Start Ch 0 Stop Ch 511 Fig 7 1 Code Domain Power Display for R amp S FSV K73 The Code Domain Power display mode shows the power of the different code chan nels in the the adjusted slot Due to the circumstance that the power is regulated from slot to slot the result power may differ between different slots Detected channels are painted yellow The channel which is adjusted via Select Channel is marked red The codes where no channel could be detected are painted cyan Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 03 1 55 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 If some of the DPCH channels contain incorrect pilot symbols these channels are marked with the color green and an INCORRECT PILOT message is displayed in the status bar If HS DPA UPA is set to ON in the Channel Detection Settings Common Settings dialog box channels without pilot symbols e g channels of type HS PDSCH are recognized as active Remote command CALC FEED XPOW CDP see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 113 Composite EVM RMS The Composite EVM measurement displays the error between the entire measure ment signal and the ideal reference signal in present The error is averaged over all channels for different slots A bar diagram with EVM values versus slots is used The Composite EVM measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time Remo
255. roduced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example Manual operation CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 73 See Marker Norm Delta on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank In the persistence spectrum result display the command also defines if the delta marker is positioned on the persistence trace or the maxhold trace Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Parameters lt TraceNumber gt Example Selects the measurement window Selects the marker 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on MAXHold Defines the maxhold trace as the trace to put the delta marker on
256. s a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT ESP Starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated num ber of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the pre vious results are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the mea surement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin gle sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Mode all MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command stores the current list evaluation results ina lt file name gt dat file The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt Example MME
257. s in use the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the next power class Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt RST 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 MAX 40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to 40 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum lt Level gt This command sets the minimum lower level limit for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always start at 200 dBm i e the first lower limit can not be set If more than one power class is in use the lower limit must equal the upper limit of the previous power class Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric_value gt RST 200 for class1 otherwise 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL2 MIN 40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to 40 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the fac tory set values are restored CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Example CALC LIM ESP REST Resets the limit lines for the Spectrum
258. s range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 191 Ref Level Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 209 Ref Level Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 210 Preamp On Off Frontend Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 218 Adjust Ref Lvl Frontend Settings Defines the optimal reference level
259. s the following coupling ratio video bandwidth 10 x resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth 10 MHz max VBW This coupling ratio is recommended whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping No additional evaluation is performed by the video filter This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 189 RBW VBW Noise 10 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth 10 At this coupling ratio noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain For noise signals the average value is displayed This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 189 RBW VBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0 001 to 1000 This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 189 Span RBW Auto 100 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio resolution bandwidth span 100 Th
260. sible according to the specification In addition to these two channel configurations the HS DPCCH channel can be transmitted to operate the mobile station in HSDPA mode Thus the R amp S FSV K73 checks for these channel configurations only during the automatic channel search Therefore channels whose parameters do not correspond to one of these configurations are not automatically detected as active channels The two possible channel configurations are summarized below Table 5 1 Channel configuration 1 DPCCH and 1 DPDCH Channel type Number of chan Symbol rate Spreading Mapping to compo nels code s nent DPCCH 1 15 ksps 0 Q DPDCH 1 15 ksps 960 spreading l ksps factor 4 Table 5 2 Channel configuration 2 DPCCH and up to 6 DPDCH Channel type Number of channels Symbol rate Spreading code s Mapping to component DPCCH 1 15 ksps 0 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 1 I DPDCH 1 960 ksps 1 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 3 l DPDCH 1 960 ksps 3 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 2 l DPDCH 1 960 ksps 2 Q Table 5 3 Channel configuration 3 DPCCH up to 6 DPDCH and 1 HS DPCCH The channel configura tion is as above in table 4 2 On HS DPCCH is added to each channel table Number of Symbol rate all DPDCH Symbol rate Spreading code Mapping to component DPDCH HS DPCCH HS DPCCH HS DPCCH 1 15 960 ksps 15 ksps 64 Q 2 1920 ksps 15 ksps 1 I 3 2880 ksps 15
261. sine wave signal In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impe dance 50 Q or 75 Q conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 164 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 218 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto softkey this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer a
262. t Channel Table dialog box to edit the currently displayed channel table Edit the settings as described for a new table see New on page 49 and select Save Delete Channel Detection Settings Deletes the currently displayed channel table after a message is confirmed Demod Settings Opens the Demodulation Settings dialog box Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Demodulation Evaluation Settings Common Settings Code Power Displ Normalize On off Meas Interval Slot Halfslot Eliminate Tail Chips On 6 otf Code Power Displ Demod Settings Switches between showing the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen ref erence This parameter only affects the display mode Code Domain Power Remote command SENSe CDPower PDIsplay on page 176 Normalize Demod Settings Changes the elimination of the DC offset If the radio button On is selected the DC offset is eliminated Otherwise the DC Offset is not eliminated Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 176 Meas Interval Demod Settings Switches between the analysis of an half slot or a full slot Both measurement intervals are influenced by the settings of Eliminate Tail Chips If Eliminate Tail Chips is set to On 96 chips at both ends of the measurement interval are not taken into account for analysis Slot The length of each analysis interval is 2560 chips corresponding to one time slot of
263. t n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the relative limit of the upper lower adjacent channel for adja c
264. t n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis Value This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Delay gt This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Delay gt Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0 to 30s RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 47 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt TriggerLevel gt This command sets the level of the external trigger source in Volt Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 35V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence MASK CONDition Condition This command sets the condition that activates the frequency mask trigger Parameters Condition ENTer Triggers on entering the freque
265. t should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no valid results are available Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters ON OFF RST OFF 8 2 4 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the first alter nate adjacent channels Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt 1 11 gt RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the selected alternate adjacent channel in the selected measurement window for adjacent channel power measure ments The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the alternate channel If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command pro duces a query error Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters The result is returned in the form lt result gt lt result gt where lt result gt PASSED FAILED and where the first second returned value denotes the lower upper alternate adjacent channel Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CALCulate MARKer subsystem CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt sm gt AOF F esten sisseisssti isses sisi sss ss sss asina 122 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM
266. t values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ALT2 RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe lt State gt This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power mea surements The commands CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on the ACLR limit check CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class 8 2 6 3 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt irrelevant
267. tate gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command activates and deactivates the YIG filter Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG filter Mode RT Manual operation See YIG Filter On Off on page 96 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on Manual operation See Preamp On Off on page 45 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 50 O Example INP IMP 75 Manual operation See Input 50 0 75 Q on pag
268. te command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR MACC see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 113 Peak Code Domain Error Peak Code Domain Error display mode determines the maximum of the code domain error values for a given slot and for all codes This display is a bar diagram over slots The unit is dB The Peak Code Domain Error measurement covers the entire signal and the entire observation time Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCD see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 113 EVM vs Chip For the Meas Interval Slot see Demod Settings on page 51 the Error Vector Mag nitude EVM is displayed for all chips of the slected slot For the Meas Interval Halfslot see Demod Settings on page 51 the EVM is dis played for the chips of one half slot The selected slot halfslot can be varied Possible entries are 0 to 14 for Slot and 0 to 29 for Halfslot The EVM is calculated as the root of the squared difference between the received and reference signal The reference signal is estimated out of the channel configurations of all active channels The EVM is given in percent referred to the square root of the mean power of the reference signal EVM rr 100 N 2560 k e 0 v 1 2 Xy Weyl where Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 EVM vector error of the chip EVM of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received s
269. ted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSVR displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 194 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 193 Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R amp S FSVR specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 192 7 2 6 3 RF Measurements Last Span Sets the span to the previous value With this function e g a fast change between overview measurement and detailed measurement is possible Remote command Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is pro vided in the corresponding softkey description Ref Level e
270. ter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 187 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW x 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 187 Coupling Ratio Opens a submenu to select the coupling ratios for functions coupled to the bandwidth This softkey and its submenu is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF RBW VBW Sine 1 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth video bandwidth This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured RF Measurements This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 189 RBW VBW Pulse 1 Coupling Ratio Set
271. th 6 data points The first data point position is at 10 MHz from the center frequency and at 10 dBm the second at 4 MHz from the center frequency etc CALC MASK LOW SHIF X 1MHZ CALC MASK LOW SHIF Y 10 Shifts the lower frequency mask by 1 MHz to the right and 10 dB up CALC MASK LOW STAT ON Turns the lower frequency mask on Defining the shape of an upper frequency mask CALC MASK NAME AnotherMask Creates or loads a frequency mask called AnotherMask CALC MASK MODE ABS Selects absolute power level values CALC MASK UPP 10MHZ 10 4MHZ 10 4MHZ 20 4MHZ 20 4MHZ 10 10MBZ 10 Defines an upper frequency mask with 6 data points CALC MASK UPP SHIF X 1MHZ CALC MASK UPP SHIF 10 Shift the upper frequency mask 1 MHz to the left and 10 dB up CALC MASK UPP STAT ON Turns the upper frequency mask on Alternatively you can create an upper frequency mask automatically CALC MASK UPP AUTO Automatically defines the shape of an upper frequency mask CALC MASK DEL Deletes the frequency mask called MyMask in C FreqMasks Before making any changes to a frequency mask you have to select one by name with CALCulate lt n gt MASK NAME on page 156 Compared to manual configuration of frequency masks any changes made to a fre quency mask via remote control are saved after the corresponding command has been sent CALCulatesmsMASK GCDIRGGCIOIS EE 154 CAL Gulate lt
272. the 3GPP signal The time reference for the start of slot 0 is the start of a 3GPP radio frame Halfslot The length of each analysis interval is reduced to 1280 chips corre sponding to half of one time slot of the 3GPP signal Remote command SENSe CDPower HSLot on page 173 Eliminate Tail Chips Demod Settings Selects the length of the measurement interval for calculation of error vector magnitude EVM In accordance with 3GPP specification Release 5 the EVM measurement interval is one slot 4096 chips minus 25 s at each end of the burst 3904 chips if power changes are expected If no power changes are expected the evaluation length is one slot 4096 chips Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 On Changes of power are expected Therefore an EVM measurement interval of one slot minus 25 _s 3904 chips is considered Off Changes of power are not expected Therefore an EVM measure ment interval of one slot 4096 chips is considered Default settings Remote command SENSe CDPower ETCHips on page 171 Display Config Opens the Display Configuration dialog box in which you can define how the mea surement results are displayed The code domain analyzer can show up to four result diagrams in four different screens windows at one time For each screen you can define which type of result diagram is to be displayed or deactivate the screen temporarily All results are calculated from the same dataset o
273. the area cov ered by the mask in the preview pane Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer STATe on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer STATe on page 157 Setting the trigger condition To make the trigger work you need to set a trigger condition with the Trigger Condi tion button The R amp S FSVR supports four conditions Entering Activates the trigger as soon as the signal enters the frequency mask To arm the trigger the signal initially has to be outside the frequency mask Leaving Activates the trigger as soon as the signal leaves the frequency mask To arm the trigger the signal initially has to be inside the frequency mask Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence MASK CONDition on page 221 6 3 2 Editing Mask Points You can adjust the frequency mask any way you want by adding removing and reposi tioning frequency mask data points Data points define the shape of the frequency mask In the preview pane the R amp S FSVR visualizes data points as blue circles In addition all data point positions are listed in the data point table The number of data points is limited to 801 Data points are defined by two values The first value defines the position of the data point on the horizontal frequency axis Frequency information is relative to the center frequency Note that in realtime mode the span depends on the realtime bandwidth That also means that the distance of a data point to t
274. the frequency reference for delta marker 2 Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters Reference Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer ence For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the level reference for delta marker 2 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt RefPointLevel gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed STATe State This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed if
275. ti cesi Rech Q quarter SCIeelt ME 59 R R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 sssss 79 213 R amp S Support tji 81 reference level el EE 45 68 95 Reference level 2 erint pesce 44 65 90 Reference Level Digital e WEE Resolution bandwidth RF Preamplifier B22 RF signal power FRAO rien Miadust E RMS KEE 33 98 RMS detector urhe eiecit tiere boni euet 32 RRC EE 46 T H 172 RX Settings tejicj 81 S Satipl detector 5 netter bre rhon recs 32 Sample rate Digital UO Interface remote control 216 Digital lOi EE 79 scaling EE 95 SCPI Conformity information urosis veida 109 search IMAI EE 75 EE 74 Select Channel eet EE Select Channel Slot Branch Select Slot qj 54 settings Settings Overview K73 sese 43 Signal Source e EE 78 RREMOLE control ssteissi ninisi 218 lec eaa 78 softkey of Adj Chan remote control ssssss of Samples remote control of TX Chan remote control I COMER E 0 1 RBW remote control 0 1 SPAM accion 0 1 Span remote control 0 1 Demod BW K7 gl 0 5 RBW remote control ssss 0 5 SPAM nitens 0 5 Span remote control 0 5 Demod BW K7 ACER EP ACLR Abs Rel remote contr
276. tion PNOise AUTO CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe CAL Culatesn DELETamarkeremo LINIK i roa geed eeeteeehegveniearhegenettd ake CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEF T inscite ict cere ena dein catre Gaels CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker mz MANimumNE XT CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MANImum RICH CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK esses eene nnne CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker cmz MiNimumNENT A CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHE iiio correre eene rca tet tas toe bea EE CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNmumf PEART eese ei e EE KT Elle E CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarkersim gt X x i inicie on ei Ere rre ec trice ue Eee e ED Ese ena 140 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker cmz X REI ative AA 141 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt STATO srren iaiia rar Nnr ENa daia TESTOS Eia e Ada II si Ee CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute sse eene CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe ts CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RESUIt eese enne CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RELative sese CAL Culate nzLUlMitczks ACowerACHannell RE atveltz ate CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel ABSolut
277. tional ity to work with frequency masks Name Comment Position 12 0000 MHz 0 00 dB 4 0000 MHz 40 00 dB 4 0000 MHz 40 00 dB 12 0000 MHz 0 00 dB Working with the Frequency Mask Trigger Name and description of the frequency mask Mask point table table containing all mask points Preview pane Frequency mask preview the area the frequency mask currently covers is red Frequency mask data points define the shape of the frequency mask Preview of the current measurement trace type and shape depend on currently selected measurement Insert button insert a new data points Shift X button shifts the complete frequency mask horizontally 9 Delete button deletes an existing data points 10 Shift Y button shifts the complete frequency mask vertically 11 Y Axis Rel Abs button switches between relative dB and absolute dBm amplitude values 12 Adapt Mask button creates a frequency mask automatically 13 Trigger Condition menu sets the trigger condition 14 Activate Line buttons select the upper and lower frequency mask check marks next to the buttons acti vate and deactivate a line ANOoaRWN 6 3 1 Creating a Frequency Mask Upon opening the Edit Frequency Mask dialog box the R amp S FSVR already provides a basic structure of an upper frequency mask in the live preview window It is also possible to create a new mask by pressing the New Mask softkey The New Mas
278. to Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 217 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the elec tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog b
279. ts are always trans ferred slot number level value in dB gt lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt SYMBOL EVM The number of level values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 256 10 values Spreading factor 128 20 values Spreading factor 64 40 values Spreading factor 32 80 values Spreading factor 16 160 values Spreading factor 8 320 values Spreading factor 4 640 values PEAK CODE DOMAIN ERR COMPOSITE EVM TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 15 pairs of slot slot number of CPICH and values are always transferred PEAK CODE DOMAIN ERR slot number gt level value in dB gt COMPOSITE EVM lt slot number gt lt value in 967 SYMBOL CONST The real and the imaginary part are transferred as a pair re 0 gt lt im 0 re 1 gt lt im 1 gt lt re n gt im n For the channels have exclusively or Q components in R amp S FS K73 the lt re gt or lt im gt values are 0 depending on the selected component The number of level values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 256 10 values Spreading factor 128 20 values Spreading factor 64 40 values Spreading factor 32 80 values Spreading factor 16 160 values Spreading factor 8 320 values Spreading factor 4 640 values BITSTREAM The bitstream of one slot is transferred One value is transferred per bit range 0 1 The number of symbols is not constant and may vary for each s
280. ts the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace Usage Event Manual operation See Peak on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the right of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e in descending X direction CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value Usage Event Manual operation
281. ubsystem R amp S FSV K73 Return values Return value lt Code decimal gt lt Code hexadecimal gt lt CPICH power dBm gt for each detected scrambling code A comma separated result table of the highest power values and the corresponding scrambling codes in decimal and hexadeci mal format Example SENS CDP LCOD SEAR LIST Result 16 0x10 18 04 32 0x20 22 87 48 0x30 27 62 64 0x40 29 46 Explanation in table below Mode WCDMA code dec code hex CPICH power dBm 16 0x10 18 04 32 0x20 22 87 48 0x30 27 62 64 0x40 29 46 SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue lt ScramblingCode gt This command defines the scrambling code in hexadecimal format Parameters lt ScramblingCode gt Range HO to H1fff RST 0 Example CDP LCOD H2 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Scrambling Code on page 48 See Format on page 48 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSVR or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example CDP LEV ADJ Adjusts the reference level Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt SignalComponent gt This command switches between and Q component of the signal
282. ulatesnz MARKersm zT e coiere cnan erneute pcc koe aue et CH piel sar e IR ESR EE 126 CALCulate n MARKer m X ss 25126 GAL Culate sn MARKersm 2CSLEIMits ZOOM i ioco ea koe eerta ee tn peace ceria asses Ft ng 127 CALCulate n MARKer m7 X SLIMits S TATe enun rare rnnt nnn rn tnnt rn trennt nant aae ATSA 127 CAL Culatesns MARKer sIm Y aurei rt teer etae eroe ee eens e ed dt age n aca 128 CALCulatexn gt MARKer lt m gt S TAT6 iin conr ttt terere htt er ret etri tree r etn erre tiras 125 CALCulate n MASK CDIRectory ei ee EE CALCulatesn gt MASK DEL EE ee EE ee ll EE 155 CAL Culatesn MASK EOWeESEHIPEUY n napi erg eget gto prede LC ved precoce te e CR pde 155 CAL Culatesn MASK BEIEN EE CALCulate lt n gt MASK LOWer STATe CALCulate lt n gt MASKiMODE iii in eter neenon eere rer r ATETEA TEVE iota CAL Culatesn MASKINAME GALGCulatesn MASKSPAN rtr portet mrt n I ren e REA EAE OPERE voces E Ee ea ERN ER RUE Rh GALCulatesn MASICUPP er AUTO etait erret tree rite kae ANINE t e e e d Y tree RR a tr rod GALbGulatespnz MASKCUPPer SHE UA etr artt treno rera to estu E qe EEE aea Eee eNO EEES 157 CALG latesn gt MASK UPPer SHIFt Yosin rrr en tnr t rne nen erp enr ens 157 CALCulate lt n gt MASK UPPer DATA GAblGulatesb2 MASK UPPerES TATe i rer conector eegend eege TE ATSAN STE ESENTE 157 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarc
283. ware option R amp S FSV K9 provides the power measurement functions for this test setup This softkey is only available if the R amp S FSVR option Power Sensor R amp S FSV K9 is installed For details see the chapter Instrument Functions Power Sensor K9 in the base unit description This softkey is available for RF measurements Trigger Out Sets the Trigger Out port in the Additional Interfaces option R amp S FSV B5 only to low or high Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example Remote command OUTPut TRIGger on page 226 8 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 In this section all remote control commands specific to the user equipment test option R amp S FSV K73 are described in detail For details on conventions used in this chapter refer to chapter 8 1 Notation on page 109 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 2 6 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the corre sponding subsystem in the base unit description In particular the following subsystems are identical to the base unit refer to the base unit description e CALCulate DELTamarker e CALCulate MARKer except for the specific commands described in chapter 8 2 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 on page 111 e DISPlay subsystem e FORMat subsystem e NITiate subsystem e INPut subsystem e MMEM subsystem e OUTput
284. weep Specific symbols in the bitstream may be invalid depending on the channel type and the bit rate sym bols without power The assigned invalid bits are marked by 9 EVM VS CHIP The square root of square difference between received signal and reference signal for each chip are transferred The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Output List of 2560 vector error values of all chips at the selected slot MAGNITUDE ERROR VS CHIP The magnitude difference between received signal and reference signal for each chip are transferred The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Output List of 2560 vector error values of all chips at the selected slot PHASE ERROR VS CHIP The phase differences between received signal and reference signal for each chip are transferred The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Output List of 2560 vector error values of all chips at the selected slot Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 4 trace Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Return values lt Result gt lt code class gt lt channel number gt lt absolute level gt lt relative level gt lt timing offset gt Comma separated list with 5 values for each channel the chan nels are output in ascending order sorted by code number i e in the same sequence they are displayed on screen
285. wer vs Slot on page 58 e Composite Const see Composite Constellation on page 58 e Code Domain Error see Code Domain Error Power on page 61 e Power vs Symbol see Power vs Symbol on page 63 e Symbol Const see Symbol Constellation on page 63 e Symbol EVM see Symbol EVM on page 63 e Symbol Magnitude Error see Symbol Magnitude Error on page 59 e Symbol Phase Error see Symbol Phase Error on page 59 e Bitstream see Bitstream on page 63 e Freq Err vs Slot see Freq Err vs Slot on page 64 e Phase Discontinuity see Phase Discontinuity vs Slot on page 64 The code domain power measurements are performed as specified by the 3GPP standards A signal section of approx 20 ms is recorded for analysis and then searched through to find the start of a 3GPP FDD UE frame If a frame start is found in the signal the code domain power analysis is performed for a complete frame starting from slot 0 The different result diagrams are calculated from the recorded IQ data set Therefore it is not necessary to start a new measurement in order to change the result diagram Common settings for these measurements are performed via the settings menu HOME key For details refer to the Settings Overview on page 43 dialog box RF measurements The RF Measurement option provides the following test measurement types and result displays e Output Power see chapter 7 2 1 Output Power Measurements on page 82
286. x lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares 8 2 6 6 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges lt NumberPeaks gt This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list Once the selected number of peaks has been reached the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt NumberPeaks gt 1 to 50 RST 25 Example CALC PSE SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list CALCulate STATistics subsystem CALCulate lt n gt STATisties CCDF S TATe 2 21 2 22 iter tette teu pu Fas aD et una aD De ad 160 CALCulate n STATistics NSAMples enirn euin reete th hit ate nnde aaa Eai 160 CALCulate nz GTATlstceb tzet innein niinn nineden iiiaae naianei aiiin 161 CAL CGulate lt n STATistics RESUS NEE 161 CAL Culate nz GTATlsttce GCAleATOoONCE estin iis s stes e nsi a4n 162 CALCulate nz GTATlstceGCAlexhbRAaNGe 162 CALGulatesmssSTATIstics SCALe2CREEVel d eet ete tet AEN 162 CAL Culate nz GTATlstice GCAlexvlOWer idi rr aera r a a Enae sE 163 GALGulate lt n gt STATistics SCALE YUNIT c cc2cccccecceescecccceseccsecnceedacececastcccueseaneaeanceasadens 163 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCAlexv Uber 163 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF
287. xt higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt POWer RESult PHZ lt State gt This command switches the query response of the power measurement results in the indicated measurement window between output of absolute values OFF and output referred to the measurement bandwidth ON The measurement results are output with CALC MARK FUNC POW RES Parameters lt State gt ON Results output referred to measurement bandwidth RST OFF OFF Results output in absolute values Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on m

R&S®FSV-K73 3GPP FDD UE User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSV-K73 3GPP FDD UE User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSV-K73 3GPP FDD UE User Manual